JP6411569B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that play various light-emitting modes by using a front transparent panel in a game area as a light guide unit and entering the surface of the light guide unit or inside thereof are known.

  In such a gaming machine, a symbol is formed in advance on the surface or inside of the light guide plate by a large number of portions that refract light at a predetermined angle. In addition, a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light at a predetermined timing are arranged in a line in, for example, an upper portion of the light guide plate (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When the lighting of the light emitting means for emitting light is controlled, the symbol formed on the light guide plate emits light and is visible to the player side.

JP-A-2006-195913

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, the light emission pattern of the design is simple, and there is room for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the present invention, the light guide portion disposed in a gaming machine (100) and (1501), to emit light so as to incident from a first direction with respect to the light guide part (1501) Rukoto A first light emitting means (151 1) capable of emitting light, a second light emitting means (1521) capable of emitting light so as to enter the light guide portion (1501) from the second direction, and a second light emission. Condensing means (1910) for condensing light from the means (1521) and entering the light guiding section (1501), and a pattern formed by the light guiding section (1501) is the first light emitting means (151). 1) A pattern that is made visible by light incident from 1) and that is formed by a first recessed area ( 1505) in which a plurality of recessed sections are formed and a light guide section (1510) is a light collecting means. (1910) is an area that can be visually recognized by the light incident from A second recessed area (1502 to 1504) in which a recess is formed, includes a light guide portion (1501) is provided between the first light emitting means and (1511) a first recessed area (1505), and focusing means The gist is that a region where a plurality of recesses are not formed is formed between (1910) and the second recess region (1502-1504) .

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is a front view of game machine 100 of this embodiment. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are opened with respect to an outer frame 160. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of a main control board 300. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of a main control board 300. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows various determination tables. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol determination table T2 and the jackpot type. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 1st special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 1st special 1 probability change time variation pattern table T4B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 1st special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 1st special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 2nd special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd special 1 time variation pattern table T5B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates 2nd special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by a main control board 300. 4 is a flowchart showing a pre-determination process executed by the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the prior determination information storage area 320c3 provided in sub RAM320c. FIG. 38 shows a list of processes executed on the effect control board 320. It is a flowchart of a prefetch process. It is a flowchart of an effect pattern determination process. FIG. 4 is a front view of the light guide unit 181 viewed from the player side and a rear view of the light guide unit 181 viewed from the game board 102A side. It is the sectional view on the AA line in FIG. 15 (A), and the B section enlarged view (B). D1-D1 line enlarged sectional view (A) of C1 part in FIG. 15, its modified example (B), D2-D2 line enlarged sectional view (C) of C2 part in FIG. 15 and its modified example (D) is there. The pattern 1505 emits light when the light P is emitted from the LED 1511 on the substrate 1510 to the light guide unit 1510 (A), and the symbols 1502 to 1504 emit light by the emission of the light P from the LED 1521 on the substrate 1520 to the light guide unit 1510. (B). It is the rear view of the light guide unit 1900 as a modification of the light guide unit 181 of FIG. 15, and the one part enlarged view. It is a figure for demonstrating the lens member 2000 which concerns on the modification of the lens member 1910 of FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the lens member 2100 which concerns on another modification different from the lens member 2000 of FIG. Partially enlarged front view (A) of the state in which the movable piece 117b of the conventional first grand prize winning device 2210 is about to close, and partial enlargement when the first big prize winning device 2210 in the state of closing is viewed from the direction of arrow H. A side view (B) and a partially enlarged front view (C) of a state where a plurality of game balls B are clogged in the vicinity of the entrance of the winning opening 2203 with the movable piece 117b open. A partially enlarged front view (A) for explaining the movement of the game ball B in a state where the movable piece 117b of the first grand prize winning device 117 according to this embodiment is closed, and a game in a state where the movable piece 117b is open It is a partially enlarged front view (B) for explaining the movement of the sphere B. It is a front view in the state where logo panel 2501 of logo unit 171 was removed. The positional relationship of the big gun unit 154 and the logo unit 171 is shown, (A) is a front view of the state in which the big gun unit 154 has moved to the standby position, and (B) has moved the big gun unit 154 to a position where it can be viewed. It is a front view of a state. The movement of big gun unit 154 is shown, (A) is a front view in the state where big gun unit 154 has moved to a stand-by position, and (B) is a front view in the state in which big gun unit 154 has moved to a recognizable position. . It is a front view of the state where the drive mechanism of the big gun unit 154 moves the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 from the standby position to the visible position, and the big gun unit 154 has moved to the standby position. It is a front view of the state which shows a mode that the drive mechanism of the big gun unit 154 moves the 1st movable unit 2602 and the 2nd movable unit 2603 to a visually recognizable position from a standby position. It is a front view of the state which shows a mode that the drive mechanism of the big gun unit 154 moves the 1st movable unit 2602 and the 2nd movable unit 2603 to a visually recognizable position from a standby position. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the drive mechanism of the big gun unit 154 moves the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 from the standby position to the visible position, and the big gun unit 154 has moved to the visible position. The light emission part 2503 of the 1st movable unit of the big gun unit 154 is shown, (A) is the front view, (B) is the front view of the state which removed the surface panel 2504. FIG. The light emission part 2506 of the 2nd unit of the big gun unit 154 is shown, (A) is the front view, (B) is the front view of the state which removed the surface panel 2507. FIG. It is a figure which shows the attachment state of the return spring 3301 of the drive mechanism of the big gun unit 154. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a driving mechanism of a big gun unit 154 and showing how rotation of a first gear 2712 rotated by a driving motor 2605 is transmitted to a driving shaft 2609 of a third gear 2714. The main part of the 1st gun unit 155 is shown, (A) is a front view in the state where unit main part 3502 of the 1st gun unit 155 has moved to a stand-by position, and (B) is a unit main part 3502 of the 1st gun unit 155. It is a front view of the state which has moved to the protrusion position. (A) is a rear view of the first gun unit 155, and (B) is a rear view of the second gun unit 156. The ball unit 161 is shown, (A) is a perspective view seen obliquely from the front, and (B) is a rear view. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a mode that the ball | bowl unit 161 was decomposed | disassembled and it looked from diagonally forward. It is a front view of the character plate 3801 of the ball unit 161. It is a back view of the character plate 3801 of the ball unit 161. It is the perspective view which looked at the character plate 3801 of the ball unit 161 from diagonally backward. (A) is sectional drawing of the ball unit 161 around the protrusion part 3704, (B) is explanatory drawing for a comparison. It is a figure which shows in detail the rear side LED light source 3703 and the notch part 3705 of the ball unit 161. FIG. The ball unit 161 and the ball unit drive mechanism 4401 are shown, (A) is a front view in a state where the ball unit 161 is raised, and (B) is a front view in a state where the ball unit 161 is lowered. The ball unit drive mechanism 4401 is shown, (A) is a front view of the ball unit 161 with the light guide 3702 raised, and (B) is a front view of the ball unit 161 with the light guide 3702 lowered. is there. The ball unit drive mechanism 4401 is shown, (A) is a rear view of the ball unit 161 with the light guide 3702 raised, and (B) is a rear view of the ball unit 161 with the light guide 3702 lowered. is there. 6 is a diagram for explaining a positional relationship between a ball unit 161, a light guide unit 1501 of a light guide unit 181 and a main display device 131. FIG. It is a front view showing an example of the effect using the light guide part 3702 of the ball unit 161 and the light guide part 1501 of the light guide unit 181. The main part of the holding mechanism is shown, (A) is a front view of the main part of the holding mechanism of the big gun unit 154, (B) is a rear view of the main part of the holding mechanism of the first gun unit 155 and the second gun unit 156, FIG. 6C is a front view of the main part of the holding mechanism of the ball unit 161. It is a front view of the indicator of embodiment a. It is a rear view of the display of Embodiment A. It is the schematic which shows the cross section of the indicator of Embodiment A. It is the schematic which shows a cross section in the state which decomposed | disassembled the display of Embodiment A. It is a schematic perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the indicator of Embodiment A. It is a front view of the substrate for display of embodiment A. It is a rear view of the display substrate of Embodiment A. It is a rear view of the cover member of Embodiment a. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of the display of Embodiment A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the indicator of embodiment b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the coating | coated member of embodiment b, and an identification means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a game state display. It is a front view of the indicator of embodiment b. It is a rear view of the display of embodiment b. It is the schematic which shows the cross section of the indicator of embodiment B. It is the schematic which shows a cross section in the state which decomposed | disassembled the display of embodiment b. It is a schematic perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the indicator of embodiment b. It is a front view of the display substrate of embodiment b. It is a rear view of the cover member of embodiment b. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of the indicator of embodiment B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circuit of another example of the indicator of embodiment B. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the indicator of embodiment C from the front. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the indicator of embodiment C from the back. It is explanatory drawing of the indicator of embodiment C.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 as an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. The embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and all the elements and combinations described in the embodiments are not necessarily essential to the solution means of the present invention. Absent.

[Configuration of gaming machine 100]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. Note that the gaming machine 100 fires a game ball based on a player's launch operation, and when a game ball wins a specific winning device, a pachinko game that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the win. Machine.

  In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “X direction”, particularly, the right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “+ X direction”, and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 is referred to as “−X” as necessary. Also called “direction”. The up and down direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “Y direction”, in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “+ Y direction”, and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “−Y direction”. Further, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “Z direction”, in particular, the direction toward the back side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as “+ Z direction”, and the direction toward the near side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is “ Also referred to as “−Z direction”.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 that is attached to an island facility of a game store, and an inner frame 170 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 160 on the front side of the outer frame 160. And a glass frame 150 rotatably supported by the inner frame 170 on the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is detachably provided on the glass frame 150 from the back side. Further, a glass frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting that the glass frame 150 is opened is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, and that the inner frame 170 is opened at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170. An inner frame opening switch (not shown) for detection is provided.

  The inner frame 170 is provided with main mechanisms constituting the gaming machine 100, various components, a board, and the like, and a game board unit 102 is detachably provided. A game area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the game board unit 102. The game area 106 includes a game ball flow area (not shown) in which game balls flow down and a display screen area of the main display device 131.

  The game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A made of a transparent acrylic member. A plurality of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) are arranged on the game board 102A. These nails and windmills have a function of changing the movement of the game ball or guiding it to a predetermined winning opening. In the game board 102A, the player side surface is also referred to as a front side surface, and the back side surface (the opposite side to the front side surface) is also referred to as a back side surface.

  The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is disposed in the opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131.

  In the present embodiment, the game board 102A is formed to be transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game board 102 </ b> A may be formed so as to be light transmissive and may be translucent. The game board 102A may be formed of a member other than an acrylic member, for example, a transparent plastic member.

On the lower side of the glass frame 150, an effect operation unit BSU is provided. The effect operation unit BSU includes an effect button 135 and effect operation keys 136. An upper plate 128 is provided on the back side of the effect operation unit BSU. In addition, a lower plate 129 is provided on the lower left side of the effect operation unit BSU. Furthermore, a launch handle device 103 is provided on the lower right side of the rendering operation unit BSU.
An operation lever 180, a moving rotator 190, and a retractable 137 are provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150. When a predetermined gaming state is reached, the operation lever 180, the moving rotator 190, and the retractable 137 execute a predetermined related operation. To do.

  The upper plate 128 is a plate for storing game balls to be launched into the game area 106. The lower plate 129 is a plate for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 128. The game balls stored in the upper plate 128 are led to a launch rail (not shown), and are guided to a guide rail (not shown) through the launch rail by a launch handle device 103 with a predetermined launch strength. Launched in area 106 (game ball falling area). In this case, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 due to the rotation operation of the launch handle device 103 by the player passes through the left route 106 a or the right route 106 b in the game ball flow-down area included in the game region 106. To do. Specifically, when the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 can pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 can pass through the right route 106b.

An effect button 135 is arranged at the center of the effect operation unit BSU. The effect button 135 can change the effect mode by a pressing operation.
In addition, an effect operation key 136 is provided on the right side of the effect operation unit BSU.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming area 106 has a big gun unit 154 at the upper back side, a first gun unit 155 at the back side of the right game ball flow area, and a back side of the left game ball flow area. Are provided with a second gun unit 156, a ball unit 161 on the lower back side, a logo unit 171 on the front side of the big gun unit 154, and a light guide unit 181 at the center.

Each unit 154, 155, 156, 161 provided in the game area 106 is a movable accessory (so-called gimmick), and these units 154, 155, 156, 161 are determined according to the progress of the game by the player. Various productions are performed by moving in the above operation.
In the present application, “movable accessory” is interpreted to mean a moving accessory. Further, the “combination” is broadly interpreted to include both a movable accessory and a non-moving immovable accessory.
In addition, the light guide unit 181 includes a light guide panel made of a resin such as transparent acrylic, and a light emitting unit including a plurality of LEDs. The light guide panel allows the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 to be transmitted and visually recognized, and allows a part of the panel to emit light by light incident from the light emitting unit to display a design or the like. It is possible. Details of this will be described later.

  A first starting device 112 having a starting area where a game ball can enter is provided in an area substantially below the center of the gaming area 106. The first starting device 112 is a general winning device type winning device. When a game ball is won, a big hit random number is acquired and a big hit determination is made, and a predetermined winning ball (for example, three) is paid out. . In addition, above the first starter 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails mainly in the middle of the left route 106a of the game ball flow area, so-called warp, and enters the first starter 112. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate the process.

  The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and a starting port is provided at a lower portion thereof, and a movable piece 115b is provided on the upper side of the starting port. The movable piece 115b is a game board. Movement control is performed between a protruding state protruding from 102A and a retracted state of drawing into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the start port into the second starter 115, and the game ball can easily enter the second starter 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the start port, and the game ball cannot win the second starter 115. That is, the second starting device 115 has no chance of winning a game ball when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, and increases the chance of winning the game ball when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state.

  When the game ball wins, the second starter 115 obtains a big hit random number and makes a big hit determination as in the first starter 112, and for example, the same award ball (three) as the first starter 112, for example. Will be paid out.

  Also, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, there are provided a normal symbol operation gate 113b having a normal area through which a game ball can pass and a first big prize winning device 117 capable of entering a game ball. Further, in the area on the lower right side of the game area 106, a second grand prize device 127 capable of entering a game ball is provided. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, a hit random number is acquired and a hit determination is performed. Even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the prize ball based on the passage is not paid out.

  The first grand prize winning device 117 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and an opening is provided in the lower part thereof, and a movable piece 117b is provided above the opening, and the movable piece 117b is a game. The movable control is performed between a protruding state protruding from the board 102A and a drawn-in state where the board is pulled into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the opening into the first grand prize device 117, and the game ball can be awarded to the first grand prize device 117 (this state is “open” or “open”). Also called "state"). Further, when a game ball wins the first grand prize winning device 117, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win the first big prize device 117 (this state is also referred to as “blocked” or “blocked state”). ).

  The second grand prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and an opening is provided in the lower part thereof, and a movable piece 127b is provided above the opening. The movable piece 127b is a game. The movable control is performed between a protruding state protruding from the board 102A and a drawn-in state where the board is pulled into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 127b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the opening into the second grand prize device 127, and the game ball can be awarded to the second grand prize device 127 (this state is “open” or “open”). Also called "state"). In addition, when a game ball wins the second big winning device 127, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 15 balls) is paid out. On the contrary, when the movable piece 127b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win the second big prize device 127 (this state is also referred to as “blocked” or “blocked state”). ).

  Note that game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 are discharged to the bottom of the gaming area 106. An out port 111 is provided. Further, a cover 116 that covers the gate 113b, the second starter 115, the first big prize device 117, and the second big prize device 127 from the front side is provided below the game area 106 on the right side. The cover 116 is formed with a guide portion that protrudes toward the game board 102 </ b> A in order to guide the game ball to the second starting device 115, the first big prize device 117, and the second big prize device 127.

  A main display device 131 made up of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 106, and this main display device 131 displays an image during standby when no game is being performed. Or displaying an image according to the progress of the game. Among them, a plurality of decorative symbols for informing the jackpot determination result are variably displayed based on the winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, and a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, 777 etc.) is stopped and the fixed stop is displayed, so that the jackpot is notified as a jackpot determination result.

  In other words, the decorative symbol is a variation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 described later when a game ball wins the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115. A variable display is performed in accordance with the display, and a stop display is performed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. That is, the decorative symbol variation display by the main display device 131 and the special symbol variation display timing by the first special symbol display unit 120 and the second special symbol display unit 122 are synchronized. In addition, during the display of this decorative design, you may win a jackpot by displaying various images, characters, etc., or by displaying a pre-reading effect of the reserved display related to the special design. It has also given the players a sense of expectation. In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device. However, a plasma display, an organic EL display may be used, and a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, etc. A display device may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a display 125 is provided on the lower left side of the game area 106. The display 125 includes a normal symbol display 118, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a normal symbol hold indicator 119, a first special symbol hold indicator 123, and a second And a special symbol hold indicator 124. Details of the display 125 will be described later.

  The main display device 131 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 102, and three decorative symbols are variably displayed and various effects are displayed. Such an effect displayed on the main display device 131 is executed based on an effect pattern described later. Hereinafter, the effect displayed on the main display device 131 is also simply referred to as “display effect”. In the present embodiment, the decorative design includes numerals 1 to 9 and a special design.

  In the display effect in the main display device 131, when the jackpot determination to be described later is won, that is, in the case of a jackpot, finally, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a jackpot symbol array (for example, “ "7,7,7" or the like) is displayed. Further, in the display effect, when the winning is determined in the jackpot determination to be described later, that is, in the case of losing, finally, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a losing symbol array (for example, “2, 5” is displayed). , 1 ”etc.) is displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

  When the player performs so-called “left strike” in which the launch handle device 103 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 106. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the launch handle device 103 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 106. Therefore, when the gate 113b, the second starter 115, the first big prize device 117 or the second big prize device 127 is awarded, “right-handed” is necessary.

The first starter 112 is a starter that is always open. On the other hand, the second starter 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starter 115 based on the determination result on condition that the game ball enters the gate 113b. In this case, a state in which a game ball is easy to enter is created. When the game ball enters the first starter 112 or the second starter 115, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired, and the following four determinations are made. Can be executed.
(1) A determination as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot determination).
(2) Determination of a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) for notifying the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 125 (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot symbol determination).
(3) In this jackpot determination symbol determination, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol representing the type of jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot symbol) is determined.
(4) Determination of whether or not to perform reach in the display effect on the main display device 131 (hereinafter, also referred to as reach determination) Determination of which variation pattern among a plurality of variation patterns (hereinafter, Also called variation pattern judgment)

The “hit game” is a special game in which the first big prize device 117 or the second big prize device 127 is opened.
“Reach” means that, in the main display device 131, two decorative symbols among the three decorative symbols to be variably displayed are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative symbols are among the three decorative symbols constituting the jackpot symbol array. The case where it becomes the state which comprises these two. For example, in the main display device 131, two decorative symbols out of three decorative symbols to be variably displayed are stopped and displayed, and the two decorative symbols are in the same state. In this case, the decorative symbols constituting two of the three decorative symbols constituting the jackpot symbol arrangement are also referred to as reach symbols.
Further, in the following description, the above four determinations that are executed on condition that a winning game ball has passed through the first starting device 112 is also referred to as “first special symbol determination”. The above four determinations executed on the condition of winning are also referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 113b, a normal symbol random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the movable piece 115b is opened. Hereinafter, the determination executed on condition that the game ball passes to the gate 113b is also referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”. In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning in normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is to be released is a specification that changes depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

  The first big winning device 117 is opened according to the result of the jackpot symbol determination. A movable piece 117b for opening and closing the first grand prize winning device 117 is provided at the opening of the first big prize winning device 117. The first grand prize winning device 117 is normally closed by the movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first big winning device 117. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by performing “right-handed” during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not performed.

[Description of Display 125]
The display 125 shown in FIG. 1 mainly displays information related to jackpot symbol determination and normal symbol determination. The first special symbol display 120, the second special symbol display 122, the first special symbol hold display 123, the first 2 has a special symbol hold indicator 124, a normal symbol indicator 118, and a normal symbol hold indicator 119.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display unit 120 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol on the first special symbol determination based on the stopped special display. Inform the results. On the first special symbol display 120, as a determination result of the jackpot symbol determination, a jackpot symbol indicating that it is a jackpot or a loss symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped manner. The

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 122 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops the display. The special symbol displayed in the second special symbol determination determines the jackpot symbol determination in the second special symbol determination. Inform the results. On the second special symbol display 122, as a determination result of the jackpot symbol determination, a jackpot symbol indicating that it is a jackpot or a loss symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss is stopped and displayed. .

  By the way, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is newly won in the first starting device 112, such as during a special symbol variation display or a big hit game related to the special symbol determination, is triggered by this winning. 1 Special symbol determination and symbol variation display are not immediately executed. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a hold function for holding the first special symbol determination and storing four random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of hold information. The first special symbol hold indicator 123 displays the number of hold information for determining the first special symbol stored in this way.

  Similarly, when the gaming machine 100 wins a new game ball in the second starting device 115, such as during a special symbol variation display or a big hit game related to the special symbol determination, the gaming machine 100 receives the second special symbol as a trigger. It is configured not to immediately execute determination and symbol variation display. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a holding function for holding the second special symbol determination and storing four random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of holding information. The second special symbol hold indicator 124 displays the number of hold information for determining the second special symbol stored in this way.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 118 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops the display, and notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination based on the stopped and displayed normal symbol. By the way, the normal symbol determination and the normal symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination are not immediately executed even when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, such as during the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 118. . Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a holding function for holding the normal symbol determination and storing the information of the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol determination as the hold information. The normal symbol hold indicator 119 displays the number of hold information for normal symbol determination stored in this way.

  Note that the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-handed lamp lights up during the jackpot gaming state described later and during the short-time gaming state described later, and it is recommended that the player make a right-hand hit (details will be described later). A round lamp is composed of one or more lamps. The round lamp shifts from an unlit state to a lit state at the time of a big hit. The round lamp indicates the number of round games depending on the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot by lighting. For example, if there are two round lamps, one of the round lamps lights up to indicate that the round game is executed four times (ie, 4R jackpot), and the other round lamp Illuminates to indicate that the round game is executed 16 times (ie, it indicates that 16R is a big hit).

[Internal configuration of gaming machine 100]
FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, an effect control board 320, an image control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a launch control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

  The main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 includes a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 includes an input port and an output port (both not shown) for main control.

  The main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 that detects that a game ball has entered the gate 113b, and a first starter detection switch that detects that a game ball has entered the first starter 112. 304, a second starter detection switch 305 that detects that a game ball has entered the second starter 115, a winning device detection switch 306 that detects that a game ball has entered the first big winning device 117, and The payout control board 310 is connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through the main control input port.

  The main control output port includes a starter opening / closing solenoid 307 for opening / closing the movable piece 115b, a first big winning device opening / closing solenoid 308 for operating a plate for opening / closing the first big winning device 117, and a second grand prize. Second large winning device opening / closing solenoid 370 for operating a plate for opening / closing the device 127, symbol indicators 118, 120, 122 for displaying special symbols and ordinary symbols, the number of reserved information for special symbol determination and ordinary symbol determination Symbol hold indicators 119, 123, and 124 for displaying the number of hold information, game information output terminal board 309 for outputting an external information signal, payout control board 310, and effect control board 320 are connected. Various signals are output from the main control output port.

  The game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer or the like of the game shop. The game information output terminal board 309 is wired to the main control board 300, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer of a game store.

  In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 301b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing.

  FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301 b of the main control board 300. FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301 c of the main control board 300. In particular, FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining stored information stored in the main ROM 301b, and FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c.

  The main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games. For example, in the main ROM 301b, as shown in FIG. 4-1, a jackpot determination table T1, a jackpot symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5. The normal symbol determination table T6 is stored.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table for determining a jackpot based on a jackpot random number. The jackpot determination table T1 includes two jackpot determination tables, that is, a non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A and a probability change jackpot determination table T1B.
The jackpot symbol determination table T2 is a table for performing jackpot symbol determination based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol determination table T2 includes two jackpot symbol determination tables, that is, a special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A and a special 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B.

The reach determination table T3 is a table for performing reach determination based on the reach determination random number. The reach determination table T3 includes four reach determination tables (not shown), that is, a special 1 normal time reach determination table, a special 1 probability change reach determination table, a special 2 normal time reach determination table, and a special 2 probability change time. And reach determination table. These four reach determination tables are selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The special 1 probability change reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in a display effect based on entering the first starting device 112 in the probability change gaming state. The special 2 normal time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The special 2 probability change reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach using a decorative symbol in a display effect based on the ball entering the second starter 115 in the probability change gaming state.
The details of various game states such as the non-probability change game state and the probability change game state will be described later.

  The first variation pattern table T4 is a table for performing variation pattern determination based on variation pattern random numbers. The first fluctuation pattern table T4 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, that is, a first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A, a first special 1 positive fluctuation pattern table T4B, and a first special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T4C. And a first special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the special symbol type. Specifically, the first special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The first special 1 variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The first special 2 normal time variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The first special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

  The second variation pattern table T5 is a table for performing variation pattern determination based on variation pattern random numbers. The second fluctuation pattern table T5 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, that is, a second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A, a second special 1 positive fluctuation pattern table T5B, and a second special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T5C. And a second special 2 variation variation pattern table T5D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the special symbol type. Specifically, the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The second special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The second special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The second special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

  Any one of these first variation pattern table T4 and second variation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of variation pattern determination, and is not selected at the same time. The first variation pattern table T4 is a table in which the average variation seconds (average production time) is shorter than the second variation pattern table T5, and the later-described acquisition pending order information is “3” or “4”. Selected. The second variation pattern table T5 is a table whose average variation seconds is longer than that of the first variation pattern table T4, and is selected when the later-described acquisition pending order information is “1” or “2”. Details of these will be described later.

The normal symbol determination table T6 is a table for performing normal symbol determination based on the normal symbol random number.
Details of the jackpot determination table T1, the jackpot symbol determination table T2, the first variation pattern table T4, the second variation pattern table T5, and the normal symbol determination table T6 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area when the main CPU 301a performs arithmetic processing, and has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 301c has a holding information storage area 301cx, a holding information determination area 301cy, and an acquired outdue equivalent information storage area 301cz. Further, the main RAM 301c is a storage area (not shown) for storing various flags (probability changing game flag, short-time game flag, jackpot game flag, etc., which will be described later), various recorded values (variable K, constant Km, which will be described later) and the like. Z).

  As shown in FIG. 4-2 (B), the hold information storage area 301cx includes four hold information areas (the first hold information) that can store the hold information related to the first starter 112 and the hold order information at the time of acquisition in association with each other. 1 hold information area, 2nd hold information area, 3rd hold information area, 4th hold information area), and 4 hold information areas (first hold information area, A second reserved information area, a third reserved information area, and a fourth reserved information area).

  In the hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the hold information storage area 301cx, the hold information is stored in the first hold information area with the highest priority, and the hold information is stored in the first hold information area. If stored, then the second reserved information area is preferentially stored, the third reserved information area is preferentially stored, and finally the fourth reserved information area is stored. Selected. The same applies to the hold information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In FIG. 4B, “O” is shown in the hold information area where the hold information is stored, and “-” is shown in the hold information area where the hold information is not stored. It is shown.

The on-hold hold order information stored in the hold information area of the hold information storage area 301cx is information indicating the hold order when the hold information is acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area stored at that time when the hold information is acquired. For example, when the hold information is acquired and the hold information is stored only in the first hold information area, the hold information is stored in the second hold information area. The information is “2”. When the hold information is acquired and the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area. Since it is stored, the reservation order information at the time of acquisition is “4”.
The hold information determination area 301cy is a determination area in which special symbol determination is executed based on the hold information.

The acquired output equivalent information storage area 301cz is information for storing acquired output equivalent information. The acquired payout equivalent information represents the number of game balls paid out to the player based on winning in the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 in the big hit gaming state. The number represented by the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301 cz (also referred to as the earned ball equivalent number) is one game ball in the first big prize device 117 and the second big prize device 127. Upon entering, the number of winning balls (for example, 15 for the first big prize device 117 and 10 for the second big prize device 127) is added. In other words, the number represented by the information corresponding to the winning game is a value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls that have entered the first big prize device 117 and the second big prize device 127 by the number of prize balls in the big hit gaming state.
Note that the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is reset (erased) by the main CPU 301a when the short-time gaming state ends. Therefore, the number represented by this earned ball equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out to the jackpot gaming state at the time of the first jackpot and the case where the game state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state again before the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot ends. This is the sum of the number of game balls paid out. In other words, the number of winning balls equivalent while the short-time gaming state continues is incremented by the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state every time the jackpot gaming state is shifted.

  The payout control board 310 performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 310 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on an input signal from the payout ball measuring switch 311, the door opening switch 312, and the timer that detects whether or not the game ball has been paid out, and performs arithmetic processing. And corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 300 based on the processing. Further, a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game ball storage unit to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 310. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to control the predetermined prize. Pay the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU.

  The effect control board 320 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or standby. The effect control board 320 includes a sub CPU 320a, a sub ROM 320b, and a sub RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads out a program stored in the sub ROM 320b based on various commands received from the main control board 300, various units, presentation operation keys 136, and input signals from the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and Based on the processing, the corresponding data is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340.

  For example, when the sub CPU 320a in the effect control board 320 receives the change start command from the main control board 300, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the effect button 135, the big gun unit 154, the first gun unit 155, and the second gun. An effect pattern for causing the unit 156, the ball unit 161, the logo unit 171, the light guide unit 181 and the like to execute a game effect is determined, and an effect pattern designation command for executing the effect pattern is determined by the image control board 330 and the lamp control. Transmit to the substrate 340. Details of the determination of the effect pattern will be described later.

  The sub ROM 320b stores a program for effect control, data necessary for determining various games, and a plurality of tables. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The sub RAM 320c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 320a, and stores a gaming state, a production pattern, a decorative symbol, a counter, and firing operation information. The sub RAM 320c is provided with a plurality of storage areas. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

  The image control board 330 includes an image CPU (not shown), control ROM, control RAM, CGROM, VRAM, VDP, audio CPU, audio ROM, and audio RAM for performing image display control of the main display device 131. . The image control board 330 is connected to the effect control board 320 so that bidirectional communication is possible, and a main display device 131 and an audio output device 331 are connected to the output side thereof.

  The image CPU performs control to display a predetermined image on the VDP based on the command received from the effect control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area when the image CPU performs arithmetic processing, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM stores a control processing program for the image CPU, an animation pattern for displaying an animation based on the effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like.

  The CGROM stores a large number of image data such as decorative symbols and backgrounds displayed on the main display device 131. The image CPU executes a predetermined program based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. At the same time as reading, predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is developed in the VRAM, and the image data developed in the VRAM is controlled to be displayed on the main display device 131, thereby realizing a display effect.

  The audio ROM stores a large number of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads a predetermined program based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. At the same time, audio output control is performed in the audio output device 331 to realize audio production.

  The lamp control board 340 performs control of various movable accessories and control of the lighting device 342 for production such as a lamp built in the production button 135 and a lamp built in the launching handle 103. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 controls the driving of the effect button 135, the big gun unit 154, the first gun unit 155, the second gun unit 156, and the ball unit 161, so that a movable accessory ( Realizes the moving effect of moving objects. In addition, the lamp control board 340 realizes a light emission effect and an illumination effect by lighting control or blinking control of the logo unit 171, the light guide unit 181 and the effect lighting device 342.

  The firing control board 350 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and performs energization control on the firing solenoid 353 and the ball feed solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 352.

  The touch sensor 351 includes a capacitance type proximity switch that uses a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the firing handle device 103, and detects that the player has touched the firing handle device 103. Then, a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid 353 is output to the firing control board 350.

  The firing volume 352 includes a variable resistor, and a constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 is divided by the variable resistor, and the divided voltage is supplied to the firing control board 350.

  Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  Note that the touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 352 are input to the effect control board 320. Thereby, it is possible to detect the launch of the game ball on the effect control board 320.

  The power supply board 360 includes a backup power supply including a capacitor and supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, the power supply voltage is supplied to the main control board 300, the payout control board 310, the effect control board 320, and the launch control board 350. Further, the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100 is monitored, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, a power interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 300. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 301a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

[Description of gaming state]
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables and the like. Specifically, FIG. 5A shows a non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A, FIG. 5B shows a probability change jackpot determination table T1B, and FIG. 5C shows a normal symbol determination table T6. Indicates.

  In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming state relating to the jackpot determination can be set to “non-probability changing gaming state” or “probability changing gaming state”. Further, in the gaming machine 100, the game state relating to the normal symbol determination can be set to “non-short game state” or “time-short game state”. These gaming states will be described below.

[Explanation of non-probability game state and probability change game state]
In the jackpot determination in the non-probability variable gaming state, the non-probability variable jackpot determination table T1A shown in FIG. 5A is used. In the non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A, the jackpot value determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination is set to three numerical values “0” to “2”. In the jackpot determination using the non-probable change jackpot determination table T1A, a jackpot random number (a numerical value of “0” to “1199”) acquired when entering the first starter 112 or the second starter 115 is obtained. If it is one of the above three jackpot values, it is determined as “big hit”, and if it is not any of them, it is determined as “lost”. That is, in the case of the non-probability variable gaming state, the probability that the jackpot determination is determined to be a jackpot (also referred to as a jackpot probability) is 1/400.

  For jackpot determination in the probability variation state, a probability variation jackpot determination table T1B shown in FIG. 5B is used. In the probability change jackpot determination table T1B, the jackpot value determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination is set to 20 numbers from “0” to “19”. In the jackpot determination using the probability change jackpot determination table T1B, the jackpot random number (a numerical value of “0” to “1199”) acquired when entering the first starter 112 or the second starter 115 is If it is any of the above 20 jackpot values, it is determined as “big hit”, and if it is not any of them, it is determined as “lost”. That is, the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state is 1/60.

  Therefore, the probability variation gaming state is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination is set higher than that in the non-probability variation gaming state, and is more advantageous to the player than the non-probability variation gaming state. In the case of the probability variation game state, the probability variation game flag is set to “ON”, and in the case of the non-probability variation game state, the probability variation game flag is “OFF”. Further, the transition from the non-probability change gaming state to the probability change game state or the transition from the probability change game state to the non-probability change game state may be executed after the end of the jackpot game.

[Explanation of non-short game state and short-time game state]
As shown in FIG. 5C, in the normal symbol determination table T6, in the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning value determined to be a winning is set only to “0”, and the normal symbol determination in the time-saving gaming state In this case, 65535 hit values from “0” to “65534” are set.

  In the normal symbol determination in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol random number (a numerical value of “0” to “65535”) acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 113b is the only one hit value “0”. When it is, it is determined as “winning”, and when it is not “0”, it is determined as “lost”. That is, in the non-short-time gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is 1/65536.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol determination in the short-time gaming state, the normal symbol random number (a numerical value of “0” to “65535”) acquired when the game ball passes to the gate 113b is one of the above 65535 winning values. When it is, it is determined as “winning”, and when it is neither, it is determined as “lost”. That is, in the non-short-time gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is 65535 / 65536≈1 / 1.00002.

  Also, in the non-short-time gaming state, after the normal symbol determination is executed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 113b, the variation time from the start of the normal symbol change to the stop display is 12 seconds. The opening control time for moving the movable piece 115b to open the second starter 115 when the winning is won is set to be relatively short, 0.2 seconds. That is, in the non-short game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, the normal symbol determination is performed, and the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 118. Is stopped and displayed 12 seconds after starting. If the determination result is a win, the second starter 115 is opened for 0.2 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the normal symbol stop display.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, after the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 113b, the variation time from the start of the variation of the normal symbol to the stop display is 3 The opening control time for moving the movable piece 115b to open the second starter 115 when the winning is won is set to be relatively long as 2.5 seconds. That is, in the short-time gaming state, when the game ball passes through the gate 113b, the normal symbol determination is performed, and the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 118. Stop display 3 seconds after starting. If the determination result is a win, the second starting device 115 is opened for 2.5 seconds by the movement of the movable piece 115b after the normal symbol stop display.

As described above, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol determination hit probability is set to be relatively low as 1/65536, the normal symbol variation time is set to be relatively long as 12 seconds, and the movable piece The opening control time of 115b is set to be relatively short as 0.2 seconds.
On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the normal symbol determination hit probability is set to a relatively high value of 65535/65536, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short value of 3 seconds, and the movable piece 115b is opened. The control time is set relatively long as 2.5 seconds.

  Therefore, when the same number of game balls pass through the gate 113b, the time-saving gaming state is more easily controlled in the open state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. Thereby, in the short-time gaming state, the consumption of the game ball is suppressed during the progress of the game, and the game can proceed more advantageously for the player than in the non-short-time gaming state. In the short-time game state, the short-time game flag is set to “ON”, and in the non-short-time game state, the short-time game flag is “OFF”. Further, the transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state, or the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state can be executed after the jackpot game ends.

  In the short-time gaming state of the above embodiment, compared to the non-short-time state, the probability of normal symbol determination is high, the variation time of the normal symbol is short, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b is set long. Although the consumption of game balls is suppressed in the progress of the game, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the short-time gaming state, as compared with the non-short-time gaming state, at least one of the normal symbol determination hit probability, the normal symbol variation time, and the opening control time of the movable piece 115b suppresses the consumption of the game ball. It may be set to be. For example, in the short-time gaming state, in order to suppress the consumption of the game ball, it may be set so that only the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the non-short-time gaming state.

Hereinafter, a gaming state that is a non-probability changing gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state is also referred to as a normal gaming state. A gaming state that is a non-probability variable gaming state and a short-time gaming state is also referred to as a low-probability short-time gaming state. A gaming state that is a probable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state is also referred to as a highly-probable non-time-short gaming state. A gaming state that is a probable gaming state and a short-time gaming state is also referred to as a high-probability short-time gaming state (latent gaming state).
Also, the short-time gaming state can be continuously performed for a predetermined number of fluctuations. The number of fluctuations in which the short-time gaming state is performed in this way is also referred to as a time-short fluctuation number.

[Description of jackpot game]
The jackpot game is executed when the jackpot game flag is ON, an opening effect until the first big winning device 117 is first opened, and a plurality of round games in which the first big winning device 117 repeats opening and closing. The ending effect from when the first grand prize winning device 117 is closed (in the case of a 16-round continuous game, the second big prize winning device 127 is closed) until the next change in the special symbol is started. The round game refers to a single opening period of the first grand prize winning device 117, and includes a long opening round game and a short opening round game.

  In the long open round game, when a prescribed number (9 in the present embodiment) of game balls enter the first grand prize winning device 117, one round game is completed. Even if the specified number of game balls do not enter, one round game ends when the specified number of seconds (29.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. In such a long open round game, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first grand prize winning device 117 and a player can acquire award balls according to the winning ball, so a large amount of prize balls can be acquired. It is. In addition, when 16 round games of long open are executed, a bonus state is entered, and after the 16th round game is finished, the second grand prize winning device 127 is opened, and a prescribed number (in this embodiment, X pieces). The bonus state in which the game balls of) enter is completed. Even when the specified number of game balls do not enter, the bonus state ends when the specified number of seconds (in this embodiment, Y seconds) elapses. In this way, when 16 round-opening round games are executed, a bonus state is established, and the second big winning device 127 is opened, so that a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in a round game of short opening, for example, the first grand prize winning device 117 is released for 0.1 seconds, and one round game is ended. This is an open mode called “Paka”, which is an open mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter. Therefore, when the short is opened, it is not possible to expect a game ball to enter the first grand prize winning device 117, and almost no prize ball can be expected.
Such a “big hit game” is digested by so-called “right-handed”. Even if it is short-opening, if a game ball enters, a winning ball is played, so “right-handed” may be instructed.

[Explanation of jackpot type]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot symbol determination table T2 and the distribution ratio of the jackpot type. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A, FIG. 6B is an explanatory diagram showing the special 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B, and FIG. 6C is a jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution ratio of a classification.

As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, in the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A and the special 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B in the present embodiment, “special symbol A”, “specific symbol B” and “Specific symbol C” is set. In these jackpot symbol determination tables T2A and T2B, random numbers (numerical values) 0 to 9 are assigned to the specific symbols A to C, and the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol is determined by the number of assigned random numbers (numerical values). ing.
Below, each jackpot symbol (jackpot type) and its selection ratio will be described.

(1) Specific symbol A: 16R probability variable jackpot The specific symbol A is a jackpot in which 16 long-open round games are executed in the jackpot game. In the case of a big win with the specific symbol A, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with a flat eye so that the big hit with the specific symbol A is notified. Further, when the big win is made with the specific symbol A, the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability short-time gaming state after the big winning game is finished. At this time, the number of short-time fluctuations is 100. As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the first special symbol is a big hit, it is selected at a ratio of 2/10 because the winning value is “1, 7”. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit, the winning value is “0, 1, 4, 6, 7, 9”, so it is selected at a ratio of 6/10. In addition, after the 16 long-open round games are executed, the second big winning device 127 is in a bonus state in which it is released.
(2) Specific symbol B: 4R probability variable jackpot The specific symbol B is a jackpot in which four long-open round games are executed in the jackpot game. In the case of a big win with the specific symbol B, in the display effect on the main display device 131, the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with a flat eye so that the big hit with the specific symbol B is notified. In addition, when the big win is made with the specific symbol B, the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability short-time gaming state after the big winning game is finished. At this time, the number of short-time fluctuations is 100. As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the winning value is “0, 2, 4, 5, 8, 9”, and the ratio is 6/10. Selected. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit, the winning value is “2, 5, 8”, so it is selected at a ratio of 3/10.
(3) Specific symbol C: 2R probability variable jackpot The specific symbol C is a jackpot in which two short-open round games are executed in the jackpot game. When the special symbol C is a big win, the special symbol stops at the middle symbol of the decorative symbol in the display effect in the main display device 131, and the big bonus at the specific symbol C is notified. The special symbol is, for example, a symbol described as “probability change”. In addition, when the big win is made with the specific symbol C, the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability short-time gaming state after the big winning game is finished. At this time, the number of short-time fluctuations is 100. As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the first special symbol is a big hit, it is selected at a ratio of 2/10 because the winning value is “3, 6”. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit, it is selected at a ratio of 1/10 because the winning value is “3”.
Hereinafter, the specific symbol A is also referred to as “special A”, the specific symbol B is also referred to as “special B”, and the specific symbol C is also referred to as “special C”.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (C), the distribution ratio of the jackpot type is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, the probability of allocation to the 16R probability variation jackpot is “20%”, the probability of allocation to the 4R probability variation jackpot is “60%”, and the probability of allocation to the 2R probability variation jackpot is “20%” In the second special symbol, the probability assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot is “60%”, the probability assigned to the 4R probability variation jackpot is “30%”, and the probability assigned to the 2R probability variation jackpot is “10%”.

[Explanation of variation pattern table]
FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A. FIG. 7-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first special 1 variation pattern table T4B. FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first special 2 normal time variation pattern table T4C. FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D. FIG. 7-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A. FIG. 7-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second special 1 variation pattern table T5B. FIG. 7-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C. FIG. 7-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D. First, the first special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A will be described, and then the other fluctuation pattern tables T4B, T4C, T4D, T5A, T5B, T5C, and T5D will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the first special 1 normal time first variation pattern table T4A has 19 variation patterns from variation pattern 1 to variation pattern 10B. These fluctuation patterns 1 to 10B will be described.

  In the first special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A, there is a variation pattern represented by “variation pattern” + “number” + “alphabet”, but “variation pattern” + “number” is the same. Basically, the corresponding basic display effect has the same variation pattern. For example, the fluctuation pattern 2A and the fluctuation pattern 2B are basically the same in the basic production corresponding to the normal reach (losing) production, and it may be different whether or not the pseudo-continuous production described later is executed. Therefore, a variation pattern having the same “variation pattern” + “number” is regarded as a variation pattern of the same type and will be described collectively.

  The basic display effect is a display effect that is a base, and is an effect that has substantially the same background image switching timing, effect switching timing, character appearance timing, and the like.

[Variation pattern 1]
The variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern for executing a normal lose effect. This variation pattern 1 has a variation time of 5 seconds and is selected at a ratio of 21/30 in the case of loss. This normal loss effect is a lost symbol array (for example, “2” “5” “1” indicating that the main display device 131 does not perform the reach formation effect to form a reach and the result of the big hit determination is a loss. )) Is formed.

[Variation pattern 2]
The variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern for executing a normal reach (losing) effect as a basic effect. Among these, the fluctuation pattern 2A executes a normal reach (losing) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and is selected by 2/30 in the case of a loss. The normal reach (losing) effect (without the pseudo-continuous effect) is changing in the main display device 131 without the pseudo-continuous effect being performed, the reach forming effect for forming the reach being performed, and the development effect being not performed. This is an effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the reach symbol, and a lost symbol array (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) is formed.

  Here, the pseudo-continuous production will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect (or pseudo-continuous variation effect) is a special symbol variation display that displays a variation of a decorative symbol, temporarily stops the decoration symbol, then displays the variation again, and then displays the variation of the decorative symbol. It is an effect that repeats pseudo. In this case, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol may be variably displayed after being slowed down without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol. Good.

  The fluctuation pattern 2B executes a normal reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-continuous effects), has a fluctuation time of 16 seconds, and is selected by 2/30 in the case of a loss. This normal reach (losing) effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is performed in the main display device 131 after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the reach forming effect for forming the reach is executed, and then the development effect is not performed and the decoration is changing. This is an effect in which a symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol, and a lost symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 3]
The variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern when a normal reach (per special C) effect is executed. The variation pattern 3A is selected when a normal reach (per special C) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the variation time is 10 seconds, and the special symbol C is a big hit. Normal reach (per special C) production (no pseudo-continuous production) is not executed, but after the reach formation production is performed, the development effect is not performed, and the changing decorative design stops at the special design. This is an effect that is displayed and a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot in the specific symbol C is formed.

  The variation pattern 3B is selected when a normal reach (per special C) production (with pseudo-continuous production) is executed, the variation time is 16 seconds, and the special symbol C is a big hit. Normal reach (per special C) effect (with pseudo-ream effect) is executed, pseudo-ream effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the development effect is not performed, and the decorative design that is changing is stopped and displayed as a special symbol. Thus, the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot in the specific symbol C is produced.

[Variation pattern 4]
The variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern for executing an SP reach (losing) effect. The variation pattern 4A executes an SP reach (losing) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 30 seconds, and is selected by 3/60 in the case of a loss. In the SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-ream effect), the pseudo-ream effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the SP reach effect which is one of the super reach effects is executed as the development effect. This is an effect in which a symbol array is formed.

  The fluctuation pattern 4B executes an SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-continuous effects), has a fluctuation time of 36 seconds, and is selected by 3/60 in the case of a loss. In the SP reach (losing) effect (with pseudo-ream effect), the pseudo-ream effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the SP reach effect which is one of the super reach effects is executed as the development effect. This is an effect in which a symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 5]
The variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern for executing the SP reach (special A, per special B) effect. The variation pattern 5A executes the SP reach (special A, special B per) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 30 seconds, and is 1/30 of the jackpot of the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B Selected. The SP reach (special A, special B per) effect (no pseudo-continuous effect) is executed without the pseudo-continuous effect being executed, and after the reach formation effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed and the specific symbol A or specific This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array (for example, “7” “7” “7”) representing the jackpot in symbol B is formed.

  Fluctuation pattern 5B executes SP reach (special A, per special B) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 36 seconds, and is 4/30 in the case of jackpot in specific symbol A or specific symbol B Selected. The SP reach (special A, per special B) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect) is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the reach formation effect is executed, and then the SP reach effect is executed. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot is formed.

[Variation pattern 6]
The variation pattern 6 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (losing) effect 1. The variation pattern 6A is executed in SPSP reach (losing) effect 1 (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 60 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the loss. The SPSP reach (losing) effect 1 (without the pseudo-ream effect) is one of the super-reach effects as a development effect after the reach formation effect and the SP reach effect are executed without the pseudo-ream effect being executed. The SPSP reach effect is executed, and the lost symbol array is formed.

  The fluctuation pattern 6B is executed in SPSP reach (losing) effect 1 (with pseudo-continuous effects), has a fluctuation time of 66 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the loss. SPSP reach (losing) effect 1 (with pseudo-ream effect) is executed, and after the reach formation effect and the SP reach effect are executed, the SPSP reach is one of the super reach effects as the development effect. This is an effect in which an effect is executed and a lost symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 7]
The variation pattern 7 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (per special A, special B) effect 1. In the variation pattern 7A, the SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) effect 1 (no pseudo-ream) is executed, the variation time is 60 seconds, and it is 3/30 in the case of the big hit in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B Selected. SPSP reach (special A, per special B) effect 1 (no pseudo-ream) is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed after the reach formation effect and the SP effect are executed without executing the pseudo-ream effect. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in A or a specific symbol B is formed.

  In the variation pattern 7B, SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) effect 1 (with pseudo-ream) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and it is 7/30 in the case of a big hit in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B Selected. SPSP reach (special A, per special B) effect 1 (with pseudo-ream) is executed, and after the reach formation effect and SP effect are executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed and the specific symbol A or This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the specific symbol B is formed.

[Variation pattern 8]
The variation pattern 8 is a variation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (losing) effect 2. The variation pattern 8A is executed in SPSP reach (losing) effect 2 (no pseudo-continuous effect), has a variation time of 60 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the loss. The SPSP reach (losing) effect 2 (no pseudo-ream effect) is one of the super reach effects as a development effect after the reach formation effect and the SP reach effect are executed without the pseudo-ream effect being executed. The SPSP reach effect is executed, and the lost symbol array is formed.

  For the fluctuation pattern 8B, SPSP reach (losing) effect 2 (with pseudo-continuous effects) is executed, the fluctuation time is 66 seconds, and is selected at 1/60 of the case of loss. SPSP reach (losing) production 2 (with pseudo-continuous production) is executed, and after the reach formation production and SP reach production are executed, SPSP reach is one of the super-reach productions. This is an effect in which an effect is executed and a lost symbol array is formed.

[Variation pattern 9]
The fluctuation pattern 9 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the SPSP reach (per special A, special B) effect 2. In the variation pattern 9A, SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) production 2 (no pseudo-continuous production) is executed, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the 3 / 30 is selected. SPSP reach (special A, per special B) effect 2 (no pseudo-continuous effect) is specified after the reach formation effect and the SP effect are executed without executing the pseudo-continuous effect, and the SPSP reach effect is executed. This is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot in the symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the variation pattern 9B, SPSP reach (per special A, per special B) production 2 (with pseudo-continuous production) is executed, the variation time is 66 seconds, and 7 / 30 is selected. SPSP reach (special A, per special B) effect 2 (with a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and after the reach formation effect and the SP effect are executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed and the specific symbol A Or it is an effect in which a jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot in the specific symbol B is formed.

[Variation pattern 10]
The fluctuation pattern 10 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the SPSP reach revival (per special A, special B) effect. In the variation pattern 10A, the SPSP reach revival (per special A, per special B) production (no pseudo-continuous production) is executed, the fluctuation time is 80 seconds, and the 1 / f of the case of the big win in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B 30 is selected. SPSP reach revival (special A, special B per) production (no pseudo-continuous production), the pseudo-continuous production is not executed, reach formation production, SP production, SPSP reach production is executed, once in the lost pattern arrangement After the temporary stop display, the revival effect for re-changing the decorative symbol is executed, and the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the fluctuation pattern 10B, the SPSP reach revival (special A, per special B) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, the fluctuation time is 86 seconds, and the 4 / 30 is selected. SPSP reach revival (special A, per special B) effect (with pseudo-continuous effect), pseudo-continuous effect is executed, reach formation effect, SP effect, SPSP reach effect is executed, temporarily suspended in the lost symbol array After the display, the revival effect of changing the decorative symbol again is executed, and the jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot in the specific symbol A or the specific symbol B is formed.

  In the present embodiment, as a display effect based on the variation pattern, an expectation degree in which the SP reach effect is performed is larger than the normal reach effect (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot expectation factor). ) Is set so as to increase the variation pattern. In addition, the selection rate of the variation pattern is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the SPSP reach effect is performed than when the SP reach effect is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first variation pattern table T4B at the time of the first special 1 probability variation has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11 to 20B). Among these, the variation patterns 12A to 20B are the same as the 18 variation patterns (variation patterns 2A to 10B) included in the first variation pattern table T4A in the first special 1 normal time. The variation pattern 11 included in the first variation pattern table T4B at the time of the first special 1 probability variation is a variation pattern for executing a normal loss effect similar to the variation pattern 1 included in the first variation pattern table T4A at the first special 1 normal time. However, compared with the variation pattern 1, the variation time is longer and the variation time is set to 10 seconds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7-3, the first special 2 normal time first fluctuation pattern table T4C has 19 fluctuation patterns (variation patterns 21 to 30B). The first special 1 normal variation pattern table T4A has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1 to 10B), respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7-4, the first variation pattern table T4D at the time of the first special 2 probability variation has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31 to 40B). Of these variation patterns, the variation patterns 32A to 40 are the same as the 18 variation patterns (variation patterns 2A to 10B) included in the first special 1 normal time first variation pattern table T4A. The variation pattern 31 included in the first variation pattern table T4D at the time of the first special 2 probability variation is a variation pattern for executing the normal loss effect similar to the variation pattern 1 included in the first variation pattern table T4A at the first special 1 normal time. However, compared with the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation time is short and the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 7-5, the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 1X to 10BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effects as the variation patterns 1 to 10B included in the first variation pattern table T4A of the first special 1 normal time. The variation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds than the variation patterns 1 to 10B included in the first variation pattern table T4A of the first special 1 normal time.

  As shown in FIG. 7-6, the second special 1 variation pattern table T5B has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 11X to 20BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effects as the variation patterns 11 to 20B included in the first special 1 variation variation pattern table T4B. The variation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds than the variation patterns 11 to 20B included in the variation pattern table T4B for one special one probability variation.

  7-7, the second special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 21X to 30BX) are variation patterns for executing the same basic effects as the variation patterns 21 to 30B included in the first special 2 normal variation pattern table T4C. The variation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds than the variation patterns 21 to 30B included in the 1 special 2 normal time variation pattern table T4C.

  As shown in FIG. 7-8, the second special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D has 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX). These 19 variation patterns (variation patterns 31X to 40BX) are variation patterns for executing basic effects similar to the variation patterns 31 to 40B included in the first special 2 probability variation variation pattern table T4D. The variation time is set to be longer by about 10 seconds than the variation patterns 31 to 40B included in the variation pattern table T5D at the time of the 2 special 2 probability variation.

  That is, each variation pattern in the second variation pattern table T5 is set to have a variation time longer by about 10 seconds than each corresponding variation pattern in the first variation pattern table T4.

[List of processes on main control board 300]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300.
When the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 is supplied with power, the main CPU 301a executes main processing based on a program stored in the main ROM 301b. As the main process, the main CPU 301a executes a power restoration process for restoring the gaming state before the power interruption from the power interruption or a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 301c. Further, the main CPU 301a updates the initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers) as the main process.
Further, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes a timer interrupt process at regular intervals (for example, a 4-millisecond period) during execution of the main process. Hereinafter, various processes of the timer interrupt process will be described.

[Random number update processing]
First, the main CPU 301a executes a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and regular symbol random numbers are updated. These random numbers are incremented by “1” every time this process is performed. Each random value is returned to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

[Switch processing]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs a switch process. This switch processing is executed when a detection signal from each switch is input. The switch process includes a starter switch process, a gate switch process, a first big prize device switch process, a second big prize device switch process, and the like. The starter switch process includes a prior determination process.

[Starter switch processing]
The main CPU 301a acquires a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number when the first starter 112 or the second starter 115 enters the ball as a starter switch process, These are stored as holding information in the holding information storage area 301cx (holding information area: see FIG. 4B) of the main RAM 301c. For example, when the main CPU 301a enters the first starter 112 and obtains the hold information for the first special symbol, the main CPU 301a holds the hold information in the hold information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the hold information storage area 301cx. Is stored, and the hold information is stored in the hold information area that should be stored preferentially after the hold information area. However, when the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area, the hold information is not stored. The same process is performed when the hold information for the second special symbol is acquired.

  Further, when storing the hold information in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information storage area) as the starter switch process, the main CPU 301a stores the hold information at the time of acquisition in association with the hold information in the hold information area. Is stored. In this case, when the hold information is acquired and the hold information is not stored in the hold information area, the hold information is stored in the first hold information area. , “1”.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a prior determination process executed by the CPU 301a of the main control board 300. The main CPU 301a performs a pre-determination process during the starter switch process described above. In this preliminary determination process, the acquired hold information and acquisition hold order information are stored in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information area) when entering the first starter 112 and the second starter 115. Before the determination, jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, reach determination, and variation pattern determination are executed based on the hold information. In other words, this pre-determination process is a big hit determination process before the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 301cx (hold information area) is shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy and the special symbol determination is executed. This is a process for specifying the result, the jackpot symbol determination result, the reach determination result, and the variation pattern determination result in advance.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9, the main CPU 301a performs a jackpot determination based on the acquired hold information (a jackpot random number) in the process of S1001, and determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. When the main CPU 301a determines that it is a big win (S1001: YES), it executes a jackpot symbol determination in the processing of S1002, specifies a big hit symbol (specific symbols A, B, C) as a special symbol, Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that it is not a big hit (S1001: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is a loss, it specifies a lost symbol as a special symbol in the process of S1003, and then proceeds to S1004. To do. Next, in step S1004, the main CPU 301a executes variation pattern determination and identifies the variation pattern. Subsequently, the main CPU 301a generates a hold command in the process of S1005. In the hold command, the hold additional information indicating that the hold information is added to the hold information storage area 301cx, the specified special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a special symbol for pre-determination), and the above specified A variation pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a variation pattern for pre-determination) and acquisition hold order information associated with the hold information are included. The special symbol for preliminary determination, the variation pattern for preliminary determination, and the hold order information at the time of acquisition are collectively referred to as preliminary determination information.

[Gate switch processing]
Further, as a gate switch process, the main CPU 301a acquires a normal symbol random number when a game ball passes through the gate 113b, and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 301c.

[First Grand Prize Winner Switch Processing]
The main CPU 301a executes detection of a game ball won in the first big winning device 117 while the big winning game is being executed (during the big winning game state) as the first big winning device switch process.
In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of game balls paid out to the player on the basis of winning to the first big winning device 117 in the big hit gaming state in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c. It is added to the number represented by the information corresponding to the accrued winning ball that is stored (accumulated).
Further, the main CPU 301a resets (deletes) the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz when the short-time gaming state ends. As a result, the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is transferred while the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the first jackpot and the short-time gaming state continues. It represents the sum of the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. In other words, the number represented by the acquired payout equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the big hit game state at the time of consecutive Chang.
Furthermore, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired payout equivalent information command representing the acquired payout equivalent information when the acquired payout equivalent information is updated in the first big winning device switch process.

[Second Grand Prize Winner Switch Processing]
The main CPU 301a executes detection of a game ball won in the second big winning device 127 while the big hit game is being executed (in the big hit gaming state) as the second big winning device switch process.
In this case, the main CPU 301a stores the number of game balls paid out to the player based on the winning to the second big winning device 127 in the big hit gaming state in the earned payout equivalent information storage area 301cz of the main RAM 301c. It is added to the number represented by the information corresponding to the accrued winning ball information stored (accumulated).
Further, the main CPU 301a resets (deletes) the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz when the short-time gaming state ends. As a result, the earned ball equivalent information stored in the earned ball equivalent information storage area 301cz is transferred while the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state at the time of the first jackpot and the short-time gaming state continues. It represents the sum of the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state. In other words, the number represented by the acquired payout equivalent information is the number of game balls paid out in the big hit game state at the time of consecutive Chang.
Further, the main CPU 301a sets an acquired payout equivalent information command representing the acquired payout equivalent information when the acquired payout equivalent information is updated in the second big winning device switch process.

[Special symbol processing]
After the switch process, the main CPU 301a performs a special symbol process that is a process related to the special symbol. This special symbol process includes a hold information shift process, a jackpot determination process, a jackpot symbol determination process, a reach determination process, a variation pattern setting process, and a special symbol stop process. Each process of the special symbol process will be described below.

[Hold information shift processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a hold information shift process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a shifts the hold information and the hold order information at the time of acquisition in the hold information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c when the special symbol variation display is completed. For example, in the hold information storage area 301cx, the main CPU 301a stores hold information for the first special symbol in the first hold information area and the second hold information area, and stores the hold information for the second special symbol. If the change display of the special symbol is finished in a state where the information is not displayed, the holding information in the second holding information area corresponding to the first special symbol and the holding order information at the time of acquisition are shifted to the first holding information area. The hold information in the 1 hold information area and the hold order information at the time of acquisition are shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy of the main RAM 301c.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number and the jackpot determination table T1 included in the hold information shifted to the hold information determination area 301cy by the hold information shift process. In this case, when the gaming state is a non-probability changing gaming state, the non-probability changing jackpot determination table T1A is used, and when the gaming state is a probability changing gaming state, the probability changing jackpot determination table T1B is used.

[Big hit symbol determination processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, when the jackpot determination ends, the main CPU 301a determines that the jackpot symbol random number and the jackpot symbol determination table T2 included in the hold information shifted by the hold information shift process when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot Based on this, the jackpot symbol determination is executed to determine the jackpot symbol (special symbol). In this case, when the type of the shifted holding information is the first special symbol, the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A is used. When the type of the shifted holding information is the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 is used. The jackpot symbol determination table T2B is used. On the other hand, the main CPU 301a determines a predetermined lost symbol (special symbol) when the big hit determination results in a loss.

[Reach determination processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes reach determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301a executes reach determination based on the reach random number included in the shifted hold information and the reach determination table T3. In this case, when the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the special 1 normal time reach determination table is used. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the special 1 probability variation reach determination table is used. When the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the special 2 normal time reach determination table is used. When the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the special 2 probability variation reach determination table is used.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes a variation pattern setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301a first determines whether to select the first variation pattern table T4 or the second variation pattern table T5 based on the on-holding order information at the time of acquisition. For example, when the acquisition hold order information is “3” or “4”, the first variation pattern table T4 is selected, and when the acquisition hold order information is “1” or “2”. Selects the second variation pattern table T5.

  Next, the main CPU 301a selects which variation pattern table to use based on the gaming state and the special symbol type among the four variation pattern tables included in the selected variation pattern table. For example, when the first variation pattern table T4 is selected above, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T4A to T4D of the first variation pattern table T4. In this case, when the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the first special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A is used. When the gaming state is the probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the first special one probability changing variation pattern table T4B is used. When the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the first special 2 normal time variation pattern table T4C is used. When the gaming state is the probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the first special 2 probability changing variation pattern table T4D is used.

  For example, when the second variation pattern table T5 is selected as described above, one variation pattern table is selected from the four variation pattern tables T5A to T5D of the second variation pattern table T5. In this case, when the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A is used. When the gaming state is the probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the first special symbol, the second special 1 probability changing variation pattern table T5B is used. When the gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the second special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C is used. When the gaming state is the probability changing gaming state and the type of the hold information is the second special symbol, the second special 2 probability changing variation pattern table T5D is used.

  Next, the main CPU 301a executes the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot symbol determination, the reach determination result, the variation pattern random number included in the shifted hold information, and the selected variation pattern table, and the variation pattern To decide. In this case, for example, when the specific symbol is determined as a result of the jackpot symbol determination, the variation pattern corresponding to the effect content of the specific symbol is selected from the variation patterns in the selected variation pattern table. As a result of reach determination, when it is determined that reach is to be performed, the variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table is selected from the variation patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect for which reach is performed. When the main CPU 301a determines the variation pattern, the main CPU 301a sets a variation start command including the determined variation pattern.

[Special symbol stop processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a special symbol stop process. Specifically, after the variation pattern setting process, the main CPU 301a causes the first special symbol display unit 120 or the second special symbol display unit 122 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination. When time elapses, the changing special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the jackpot symbol determination is notified by the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. In this case, the main CPU 301a sets a symbol determination command.

  Further, in the special symbol stop process, the main CPU 301a determines whether to turn on the jackpot game flag based on the determination result of the jackpot symbol determination after stopping and displaying the changing special symbol. In such a case, a process for turning on the jackpot game flag is executed. In this special symbol process, the main CPU 301a determines that when the short-time variation flag and the probability variation game flag are ON and the number of short-term fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the short-time game flag and the certain variation game flag. The process of turning off is also executed.

[Normal pattern processing]
The main CPU 301a performs normal symbol processing. The normal symbol process includes a normal symbol determination process, an operation pattern setting process, and an opening / closing member control process. Each process of the normal symbol process will be described below.

[Normal symbol determination processing]
The main CPU 301a executes a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, when there is normal symbol hold information, the main CPU 301a performs normal symbol determination based on the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol determination table T6 included in the hold information.

[Operation pattern setting process]
The main CPU 301a performs an operation pattern setting process of the movable piece 115b when it is determined that the normal symbol determination is successful. Specifically, when the main CPU 301a is in the non-short game state, the main CPU 301a sets an operation pattern in which the release for 0.1 second is performed twice (the total release control time is 0.2 seconds), and is in the short-time game state. Sets an operation pattern in which 0.5 seconds of opening is performed five times (total opening control time is 2.5 seconds). The main CPU 301a does not set the operation pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is a loss.

[Opening / closing design control processing]
The main CPU 301a executes an opening / closing member control process. Specifically, after executing the normal symbol determination, the main CPU 301a causes the normal symbol display 118 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. In this case, the variable number of seconds of the normal symbol is set to 12 seconds in the non-short game state, and is set to 3 seconds in the short time game state. The main CPU 301a controls the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b based on the operation pattern if the operation pattern is set in the operation pattern setting process after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Large winning device opening control processing]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a performs a special winning device opening control process. This big winning device release control process includes an opening pattern setting process and a gaming state setting process of the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127.

[Open pattern setting process]
When the jackpot game flag is ON, the main CPU 301a sets an opening pattern for setting the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 based on the result of the jackpot symbol determination during the opening effect. Perform the setting process. When the opening effect ends, the main CPU 301a performs opening / closing control of the first grand prize winning device 117 based on the set opening pattern, thereby realizing a round game.
In addition, when the round game is 16 rounds, when the 16-round game by the first grand prize-winning device 117 is finished (the first big prize-winning device 117 is closed), the second big game is based on the set release pattern. Opening / closing control of the winning device 127 is performed to realize a bonus game.

[Game state setting process]
In addition, when the ending effect ends, the main CPU 301a executes a process for turning off the jackpot game flag, a process for turning on the time-short game flag, and a process for turning on the probability variable game flag, and sets the number of time-changes to a predetermined number (for example, , 8000 times) game state setting processing is performed.

[Payout process]
Subsequently, the main CPU 301a executes a payout process. This payout process is a process for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning of game balls.
[Command transmission processing]
Next, the main CPU 301a executes command transmission processing. In this command transmission process, various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 301c in the above process and information necessary for determining the contents of the effects are transmitted to the effect control board 320.

[Electrical Configuration of Production Control Board 320]
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. The effect control board 320 determines an effect pattern based on a command (including a variation pattern or the like) transmitted from the main control board 300, and sends an effect pattern designation command based on the effect pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the main display device 131 and the audio output device 331 are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the effect button 135, the big gun unit 154, the first gun unit are connected to the lamp control board 340. 155, the second gun unit 156, the ball unit 161 and the logo unit 171, and the effect lighting device 342 are electrically connected. With this configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 execute the display effect, the sound effect, the lighting effect, and the accessory movable effect based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. Is possible.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sub ROM 320b stores a basic display effect designation table TS1, a decorative symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3.
Based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, the basic display effect designation table TS1 is based on the above-described normal lose effect, normal reach (losing or winning) effect, SP reach (lost or winning) effect, SPSP reach (lost or missing). Any of the winning effects 1, the SPSP reach (losing or winning) effects 2, and the SPSP reach revival (winning) effects is a basic effect in the display effects (hereinafter also referred to as a basic display effect). It is a table to specify as. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display effect correspond one-to-one.

  A plurality of basic display effects may be associated with the variation pattern, and the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select the basic display effects by lottery. In this way, the contents of the effect can be changed even with the same variation pattern. Further, one basic display effect may be associated with a plurality of variation patterns.

  The decorative symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining a combination of decorative symbols for temporary stop display or fixed stop display in a display effect based on the effect pattern, and a reach symbol when the reach is executed.

  The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in the display effect. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect for executing a display effect in a mode different from the normal effect and increasing the expectation of jackpot as compared with the normal effect.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sub RAM 320 c is provided with a holding storage area 320 c 1, an acquired appearance equivalent information storage area 320 c 2, and a prior determination information storage area 320 c 3.
The reserved storage area 320c1 includes a first reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, a fourth reserved area, a first reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol, a second reserved area, The area is divided into eight areas, ie, a reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area, and one reserved flag can be stored in each area. In the reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol in the reserved storage area 320c1, the priority order of storing the reserved flag is that the first reserved area is the highest priority for storage, and the reserved flag is stored in the first reserved area. Next, the second reserved area is selected as a storage target with priority, the third reserved area is selected as a storage target with priority, and finally the fourth reserved area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the production control board 320 receives the hold command from the main control board 300, the hold area in which the hold flag is stored is specified in the hold storage area 320c1, and the hold area to be preferentially stored next to the hold area The hold flag is stored in. However, when a hold command is received in a state where the hold flag is stored in the fourth hold area, the hold flag is not stored.

  Further, the priority order of erasure of the hold flag is the reverse of the priority order in the case of storing, that is, the fourth hold area is the erasure target with the highest priority and the hold flag is not stored in the fourth hold area. Then, the third reserved area is preferentially selected as an erase target, the second reserved area is preferentially selected as an erase target, and finally the first reserved area is selected as an erase target. When the effect control board 320 receives the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 300, the holding area in which the holding flag is stored is specified in the holding memory area 320c1, and the holding flag of the holding area to be preferentially deleted is deleted. . If the hold flag is not stored in the first hold area, the erasure process is not performed.

  The earned ball equivalent information storage area 320c2 is an area for storing earned ball equivalent information represented by the earned ball equivalent information command transmitted from the main control board 300. This earned ball equivalent information is overwritten and saved every time an earned ball equivalent information command is transmitted.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a prior determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub RAM 320c. The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variation pattern, and acquisition hold order information), corresponding to the type of special symbol, respectively. Four storage areas (a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area) are provided. Each storage area also includes a jackpot determination information field for storing jackpot determination information based on a special symbol for preliminary determination, a jackpot symbol information column for storing jackpot symbol information based on a preliminary determination symbol, and a variation for preliminary determination. Fluctuation pattern information field for storing variation pattern information based on patterns, on-holding order information field for storing on-holding order information at the time of acquisition, and continuous production presence / absence information for storing presence / absence information of continuous production indicating the presence / absence of continuous production activation And a column are provided. Although details will be described later, the continuous production presence / absence information includes continuous production activation information and continuous production activation information.

  The hold command (FIG. 9: S1005) transmitted from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variation pattern, and acquisition hold order information). The advance determination information storage area 320c3 stores these advance determination information in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing the pre-determination information is that the first storage area is the highest priority for storage, and the pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area. The second storage area is prioritized as a storage target, the third storage area is prioritized as a storage target, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state in which the advance determination information has already been stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the advance determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, reservation on hold order information “4” ”) Is stored (see FIG. 11), information representing“ 4 ”is stored in the acquisition-holding order information column of the fourth storage area, and“ variation pattern 7B ”is stored in the variation pattern information column of the fourth storage area. Is stored in the jackpot symbol information column of the fourth storage area, and information indicating “jackpot” is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area.

  In FIG. 11, as the pre-determination information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information “losing” in the jackpot determination information column, the information “none” in the jackpot symbol information column, and the variation pattern information column In addition, information of “variation pattern 1” is stored, and information indicating “3” is stored in the hold order information column at the time of acquisition. As pre-determination information for the second storage area, “losing” information in the jackpot determination information column, “none” information in the jackpot symbol information column, and “variation pattern 2AX” information in the variation pattern information column are acquired. Information representing “1” is stored in the hold order information column. As prior determination information for the third storage area, “losing” information is acquired in the jackpot determination information column, “none” information is stored in the jackpot symbol information column, and “variation pattern 4BX” information is acquired in the variation pattern information column. Information representing “2” is stored in the hold order information column.

  In the continuous effect presence / absence information column, continuous effect activation information indicating whether or not a continuous effect is to be executed is stored in a prefetching process described later. In FIG. 11, “○” is shown as continuous production activation information, which is information indicating the activation of continuous production, in the continuous production presence / absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, and other storages. In the area, “−” is shown as continuous production inactivation information that is information indicating that the continuous production is not activated.

  The sub RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) in which a predetermined flag and the like are stored. For example, a continuous execution effect flag, a pseudo-continuous effect execution flag, etc., which will be described later, are stored in this flag storage area.

[List of processes on production control board 320]
FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed on the effect control board 320. When the power is supplied, the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 executes the effect main process.

[Direction main processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes, as the effect main process, the power recovery effect process corresponding to the power recovery process executed on the main control board 300 or the RAM clear effect process corresponding to the RAM clear process executed on the main control board 300. To do.
Further, the sub CPU 320a repeatedly executes the effect timer interruption process at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during the execution of the effect main process. Note that the processing performed in such an effect control board 320 is executed based on a program stored in the sub ROM 320b.

[Production timer interrupt processing]
In the effect timer interrupt process, the sub CPU 320a executes a random number update process, a command reception process, an effect button process, and a command transmission process. Hereinafter, various processes of the effect timer interruption process will be described.

[Random number update processing]
As the random number update process, the sub CPU 320a updates various random numbers (for example, decorative design determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers) used for effects. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a adds and updates “1” to various random numbers, and resets to “0” when reaching a predetermined value.

[Command reception processing]
The sub CPU 320a performs pre-read processing, production pattern determination processing, hold processing, advance determination information shift processing, general drawing production processing, symbol confirmation processing, and earned ball equivalent information storage processing as command reception processing, Perform jackpot processing. Hereinafter, various processes of the command reception process will be described.

[Prefetch process]
The pre-reading process executes a process for determining whether to perform a continuous effect based on a hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 and a process for determining whether to perform a pseudo-continuous effect. The details of this prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The continuous effect is an effect that can be executed on the main display device 131, and is an effect that can be executed during a variation start effect, which will be described later, over a plurality of variable displays in a special symbol. This continuous effect may be composed of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the continuous effect includes a plurality of effects, one effect may be selected and executed from the plurality of effects. Further, the continuous effect may be executed for a single variation display in the special symbol.

  Further, the pseudo-continuous effect may be configured with only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the pseudo-continuous effect includes a plurality of types of effects, one effect may be selected and executed from the plurality of types of effects.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
The sub CPU 320a determines the effect pattern based on the basic display effect designation table TS1, the decorative symbol determination table TS2, and the chance up determination table TS3 as the effect pattern determination process. Details of the effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Hold processing]
When the sub CPU 320a receives a hold command from the main control board 300 as the hold process and the hold flag is not stored in the fourth hold area in the hold storage area 320c1 provided in the sub RAM 320c, A hold flag is stored in a hold area having a high storage priority. For example, when the sub CPU 320a receives a hold command in a state where the hold flag is stored in the first to second hold areas, the sub CPU 320a stores the hold flag in the third hold area. In addition, when the production pattern is determined in the production pattern determination process (when the change start command is received), the sub CPU 320a erases one hold flag from the hold area having a high hold flag deletion priority. To do. The sub CPU 320a erases the hold flag in the fourth hold area when the production pattern is determined (when the change start command is received) in a state where the hold flag is stored in the first to fourth hold areas. .

  Further, the sub CPU 320a executes a process related to the hold display as the hold process. Specifically, a hold display command for performing a hold display on the main display device 131 is set in correspondence with the four hold areas of the hold storage area 320c1. For example, in the state where the hold flag is stored in the first to third hold areas in the hold storage area 320c1, the hold display command indicating that there are three holds on the main display device 131 is set. This hold display command is transmitted to the image control board 330 in a command transmission process described later. When receiving the hold display command, the image control board 330 controls the main display device 131 to execute the hold display based on the hold display command.

[Advance information shift processing]
When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination process (when the change start command is received) as the shift process of the advance determination information, the sub CPU 320a is stored in the storage area of the advance determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub RAM 320c. The prior determination information shift process is executed. For example, when the pre-determination information is stored as shown in FIG. 11, when the pre-determination information is shifted, the information stored in the first storage area is deleted and stored in the second storage area. The information is shifted to the first storage area, the information stored in the third storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the information stored in the fourth storage area is shifted to the third storage area. Therefore, the number of prior determination information (a set of jackpot determination information, jackpot symbol information, variation pattern information) stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and the main control board 300 The number of hold information for the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 301c (hold information storage area 301cx: see FIG. 4-2) corresponds to one to one. Similarly, the number of prior determination information (one set of jackpot determination information, jackpot symbol information, variation pattern information) stored in the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and the main control board The number of hold information for the second special symbol stored in the 300 main RAM 301c (hold information storage area 301cx) corresponds to one to one. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, if pre-determination information is stored in all of the first storage area to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol, the main RAM 301c (holding information storage area 301cx) of the main control board 300 The number of hold information for the first special symbol stored in is also four.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is holding information in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the special symbol is stopped and the process proceeds to the next symbol variation, The special symbol determination is performed by preferentially using the hold information. Therefore, in the advance determination information storage area 320c3, when the advance determination information is stored in each of the storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of shifting to the fluctuating effect, the shift process of the prior determination information of the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

[Normal design effect processing]
In the normal symbol effect process, an effect corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is performed in a predetermined area of the main display device 131 (for example, a corner of the main display device 131) according to the determination result in the normal symbol determination. For example, “O” and “X” are alternately displayed during fluctuation of the normal symbol, and “O” is displayed if it is a win according to the determination result, and “X” is displayed if it is lost.

[Design determination processing]
The sub CPU 320a executes, as a symbol determination process, a process for confirming and stopping the decorative symbol being changed on the main display device 131 based on a symbol determination command from the main control board 300.

[Acquired Idama equivalent information storage process]
When the sub CPU 320a receives the acquired output equivalent information command from the main control board 300 as the acquired output equivalent information storage process, the acquired output equivalent information stored in the sub RAM 320c is stored in the acquired output equivalent information represented by the command. Store in area 320c2.
[Big hit processing]
As a jackpot process, the sub CPU 320a receives a predetermined command from the main control board 300, thereby performing an opening process for executing the first opening effect of the jackpot game and a round effect corresponding to the round game during the jackpot game. At the end of the round process for executing and the jackpot game, an ending process for executing the ending effect is executed.

[Direction button processing]
As the effect button process, the sub CPU 320a detects an input via the effect button 135 and the effect operation key 136, and performs a predetermined effect corresponding thereto.
[Command transmission processing]
The sub CPU 320a transmits the command set in the various processes to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 as the command transmission process.

[Description of prefetch processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the prefetch process. Here, the above-described prefetching process will be described below.
In this prefetch process, first, the sub CPU 320a executes a hold command reception process in the process of S1305. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control board 300. If a hold command is received, the advance determination information included in the hold command is stored in the corresponding advance determination information storage area 320c3. Store in the area. If the hold command has not been received, the pre-reading process is terminated without executing the later-described continuous effect flag setting process and the pseudo-continuous effect flag setting process.

  Subsequently, after the hold command reception process, the sub CPU 320a executes a continuous effect flag setting process in the process of S1310. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the prior determination information received in the process of S1305, in other words. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is turned ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines that the continuous effect flag is turned on when all of the following two conditions A and B are satisfied, and when one of the two conditions is not satisfied, the continuous effect is determined. It is determined that the flag is not turned ON.

Condition A: In the prior determination information storage area 320c3, there is no information representing a big hit in the prior determination information (big hit determination information column) stored before the previous determination information newly stored in the process of S1305. In other words, there is no big hit in the hold information in the hold information storage area 301cx before storing the prior determination information in the process of S1305.
Condition B: Winning prefetch lottery.

  As an example of the above condition A, the prior determination information is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, while the first to third storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol respectively Assume that the determination information is stored and the prior determination information is newly stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the process of S1305 (see FIG. 11). In this case, the condition A is satisfied if there is no information indicating a big hit in the prior determination information (big hit determination column) stored in the first storage area to the third storage area corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Further, the prefetch lottery in condition C is a lottery with the first prefetch lottery probability when the special symbol for prejudgment included in the predetermination information newly stored in the process of S1305 is a lost symbol. In this case, the lottery is set to be performed with the second look-ahead lottery probability that is higher than the first look-ahead lottery probability. Thereby, in the case of a jackpot, the probability that the prefetching effect is executed is set high. In other words, when the prefetching effect appears, the expectation of jackpot is higher than the case where the prefetching effect does not appear.

  In this embodiment, the continuous performance flag is not turned on unless all of the conditions A and B are satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the condition B is satisfied. The continuous effect flag may be turned on.

  If it is determined that the continuous effect flag is set to ON, in the prior determination information storage area 320c3, the continuous effect activation information (“◯” in FIG. 11) is displayed in the continuous effect presence / absence information column corresponding to the storage area stored in the process of S1305. ). When it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not turned ON, in the prior determination information storage area 320c3, in the continuous effect presence / absence information column corresponding to the storage area stored in the process of S1305, continuous effect non-operation information (“−” in FIG. 11). )).

  When the continuous production activation information or the continuous production non-activation information is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information column, or when the continuous production flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is already ON, the sub CPU 320a The process proceeds to S1315.

  When the continuous production flag is turned on and the continuous production activation information “O” is stored in the continuous production presence / absence information field of the prior determination information storage area 320c3, the main display device starts from the next special symbol variation display. In 131, a continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect can be executed until the display effect is executed based on the hold information corresponding to the advance determination information including the continuous effect activation information. In this case, it can be executed even during the display effect based on the hold information corresponding to the advance determination information including the continuous effect activation information.

  In addition, when the continuous effect flag is set to ON in the continuous effect flag setting process and the variable display corresponding to the pre-determination information used for the determination ends, the sub CPU 320a performs the above-described symbol determination process. Set the continuous performance flag to OFF.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 320a executes the pseudo continuous effect flag setting process in the process of S1315 after the continuous effect flag setting process. Specifically, when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON, the sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c to OFF. When the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a sets the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c to ON. Thereafter, the prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the command receiving process.

  Note that, in the effect pattern determination process described later, the sub CPU 320a performs the simulation by the pseudo-continuous effect flag setting process even when the acquired variation pattern is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the variation pattern 7B). When the continuous effect flag is set to OFF (when the continuous effect flag is ON), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed.

[Description of effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, first, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 300 (S1405). If the sub CPU 320a has not received the change start command (S1405: NO), the effect pattern determination process ends, and the process returns to the command reception process.
When the sub CPU 320a receives the change start command (S1405: YES), the sub CPU 320a acquires the change pattern included in the change start command in the process of S1410.

  Next, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern in the process of S1415. Specifically, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect pattern by determining a basic display effect, determining a continuous effect, determining a pseudo-continuous effect, determining a reach symbol, determining a chance up, and determining a stop symbol. To do. The details will be described below.

  First, the sub CPU 320a determines an effect corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 as the basic display effect based on the basic display effect designation table TS1. For example, when the acquired variation pattern is the variation pattern 6B, the sub CPU 320a determines the SPSP reach (lost) effect 1 that is the effect corresponding to the variation pattern 6B as the basic display effect based on the basic display effect designation table TS1. .

  Next, the sub CPU 320a determines execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON. When the continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a determines that the continuous effect is not executed.

  Next, when the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON and the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 corresponds to the pseudo continuous effect, the sub CPU 320a performs the pseudo continuous effect. Determine the execution. For example, the sub CPU 320a executes the pseudo continuous effect when the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is ON and the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 is “variation pattern 4B”. To decide.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a displays the pseudo continuous effect regardless of whether or not the variation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo continuous effect. Determine non-execution. For example, when the pseudo continuous effect flag stored in the sub RAM 320c is OFF, the sub CPU 320a displays the pseudo continuous effect even though the variation pattern acquired in the process of S1410 is “variation pattern 4B”. Determine non-execution.

  That is, when the continuous effect flag is ON, the pseudo-continuous effect flag is OFF. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the continuous effect flag is OFF, the pseudo continuous effect flag is ON. Therefore, if the variation pattern acquired in S1410 corresponds to the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed.

  Next, when the obtained variation pattern corresponds to the effect of executing the reach (reach formation effect), the sub CPU 320a determines the reach symbol based on the decorative symbol determination random number and the decorative symbol determination table TS2. . The sub CPU 320a skips this process when the acquired variation pattern does not correspond to the effect of executing the reach (reach formation effect).

Next, the sub CPU 320a determines whether or not to execute the chance up effect as described above based on the obtained variation pattern and the chance up random number.
Next, the sub CPU 320a determines the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped based on the acquired variation pattern and the decorative symbol determination random number.

  From the above, the sub CPU 320a determines the basic display effect, the presence / absence of the continuous effect execution, the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous effect execution, the reach symbol, the presence / absence of the chance-up execution, and the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped. An effect pattern for realizing the display effect, the accessory moving effect, the sound effect, and the light emission effect is finally determined.

[Description of design light emission mechanism of light guide]
FIG. 15 shows a front view of the light guide unit 181 viewed from the player side and a back view viewed from the game board 102A side.

  The light guide unit 181 includes a light guide 1501 having translucency, a substrate 1510 including a plurality of LEDs 1511 as an example of light emitting means that can enter the surface or end surface of the light guide 1501, and the light guide 1501. And a substrate 1520 provided with a plurality of LEDs 1521 as an example of a light emitting means capable of entering light on the surface or the end face.

  The light guide unit 1501 in this embodiment is preferably a plate material made of a transparent resin plate or glass plate. However, the light guide unit 1501 is colorless and transparent, is colored and transparent, is a translucent state with low transparency, or is a clear state with high transparency, and further has a thickness in the front and back direction. It does not matter whether the plate material is extremely small compared to the length in the vertical and horizontal directions or the block material whose thickness in this direction does not change significantly compared to the length in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  The light guide unit 1501 includes symbols 1502, 1503, 1504, and 1505 that reflect light from the LEDs 1511 and 1521 and emit light so as to be visible to the player side. Here, unlike the decorative pattern described above, the pattern means a pattern that reflects light from the light emitting means and emits light in the form of letters, numbers, symbols, lines, patterns, and the like. . In this embodiment, the symbols 1502-1504 are linear symbols. A symbol 1505 is a character symbol. In the front view of the light guide unit 181 shown on the upper side in FIG. 15, the symbols 1502 to 1505 are drawn in light gray (light gray). On the other hand, in the rear view of the light guide unit 181 illustrated on the lower side in FIG. 15, the symbols 1502 to 1505 are drawn in dark black (dark black). This means that, in this embodiment, the symbols 1502 to 1505 are formed by a large number of irregularities on the back surface (also referred to as the back surface) of the light guide unit 1501. However, the symbols 1502 to 1505 may be formed on the front side surface (also referred to as the front surface) of the light guide unit 1501 or in the thickness direction. Details of this modification will be described later.

  The substrate 1510 is disposed above in the front view or the rear view of the light guide unit 181. More specifically, it is arranged on the back side of the logo represented as “KANTZ” in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 1511 are fixed to the peripheral region on the side close to the light guide unit 1501 in the substrate 1510. The LED 1511 is a light emitting means for causing a symbol 1505 with the letters “super” as an example in this embodiment to emit light. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs 1511 are arranged on the substrate 1510 in a range that can cover the length of the symbol 1505 in the width direction (the left-right direction in the drawing).

  In addition, the board | substrate 1510 may be arrange | positioned below by the front view or back view of the light guide unit 181. FIG. Even in that case, the LED 1511 is preferably fixed to the peripheral region on the side close to the light guide portion 1501 in the substrate 1510. As a further modification, the substrate 1510 is divided into two or more, and one or more of them are upward in the front view or the rear view of the light guide unit 181, and the remaining one or two or more are guided by the light guide unit 181. These may be arranged below in front view or rear view. In that case, the symbol 1505 emits light by incident light from above and below the light guide unit 1501.

  The substrate 1520 is disposed on the left side in the rear view of the light guide unit 181. The substrate 1520 is an elongated substrate that bends in accordance with the shape of the left side in the rear view of the light guide unit 1501. The plurality of LEDs 1521 are fixed to the approximate center in the width direction of the substrate 1520 or slightly closer to the light guide unit 1501. The LED 1521 is a light emitting means for causing the linear symbols 1502 to 1504 to emit light. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs 1521 are arranged on the substrate 1520 in a range that can cover the length in the width direction (vertical direction in the drawing) of the symbols 1502 to 1504.

  The substrate 1520 may be disposed on the right side in the rear view of the light guide unit 181. Even in such a case, it is preferable that the LED 1521 is fixed to the approximate center in the width direction of the substrate 1520 or slightly closer to the light guide unit 1501. Since the substrate 1520 has a shape that is narrower than that of the substrate 1510, the LED 1521 may be fixed to the center of the substrate 1520 and further to a position far from the light guide portion 1501. As a further modified example, the substrate 1520 is divided into two or more, and one or more of them are leftward in the rear view of the light guide unit 181, and the remaining one or two or more are viewed in the rear view of the light guide unit 181. May be arranged on the right side. In this case, the symbols 1502 to 1504 emit light through incident light from the left and right sides of the light guide unit 1501.

  In this embodiment, the line widths of the linear symbols become narrower in the order of the symbol 1502, the symbol 1503, and the symbol 1504. For this reason, it is preferable to match the width of the light emitting surface of the LED 1521 with the line width. On the other hand, instead of preparing a plurality of types of LEDs 1521 having a width corresponding to the line width, only the LEDs 1521 having a light emitting surface width equal to or larger than the line width of the symbol 1502 having the widest line width may be prepared. Furthermore, it is also possible to prepare an LED 1521 having a width of an issuance surface that matches the symbol 1503 having a medium line width or the symbol 1504 having the narrowest line width. In this embodiment, a lens cover (an example of a lens member) 1530 surrounding the LED 1521 fixed to the substrate 1520 is provided on the back side of the substrate 1520. In this embodiment, the lens cover 1530 has a flat surface at a position substantially parallel to the light emitting surface of the LED 1521. For this reason, the light emission area from the LED 1521 is somewhat diffused and widened by transmitting light through the lens cover 1530. For this reason, for example, when light is emitted from a very narrow line width such as the symbol 1504, the number of the LEDs 1521 is less than the number of the symbols 1504. Simply preparing the LED 1521 makes it easy to emit the symbol 1504.

  In this embodiment, the LED 1521 is fixed to the substrate 1520 at a position where it can illuminate the back surface of the light guide unit 1501. Specifically, the LED 1521 is fixed on the substrate 1520 so that the back surface has a height of a connection surface between the light emitting surface of the LED 1521 and the substrate 1520 or a height slightly shifted from the connection surface to the light emitting surface. . As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 1521 illuminates the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 or enters a region moved slightly inward from the back surface. The LED 1511 may illuminate the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 on the substrate 1520, but may be fixed at a position where light can enter inside the back surface of the light guide unit 1501.

  FIG. 16 shows a cross-sectional view along line AA in FIG. 15 (A) and an enlarged view of part B (B), respectively.

  As shown in the AA line sectional view (A), the light P emitted from the light emitting surface 1600 of the LED 1521 passes through a part of the lens cover 1530 disposed so as to cover the LED 1521 side of the substrate 1520, and The symbols 1502 to 1504 formed on the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 are illuminated. In addition, as shown in the B part enlarged view (B), the light P emitted from the light emitting surface 1600 of the LED 1521 further spreads in the traveling direction. In FIG. 16B, the actual spread of the light P is extremely illustrated. As described above, the lens cover 1530 transmits the light P on a surface substantially parallel to the light emitting surface 1600. For this reason, the light from the LED 1521 is not burned but rather diffuses slightly within the lens cover 1530. Note that the LED 1511 positioned above the light guide unit 1501 may also be covered with a cover similar to the lens cover 1530 described above, and light from the LED 1511 may enter the light guide unit 1501 through the cover.

  17 is an enlarged sectional view taken along line D1-D1 of section C1 in FIG. 15 (A), its modified example (B), an enlarged sectional view taken along line D2-D2 of section C2 in FIG. 15 (C), and a modified example thereof. (D) is shown respectively.

  C1 part in FIG. 15 is a part of symbol 1505. As is clear from the D1-D1 line cross section of the C1 portion, in this embodiment, the design 1505 is formed by a large number of concave portions 1701 formed on the back surface 1710 of the light guide portion 1501. Each recess 1701 includes a reflective surface that easily reflects the light P emitted from the LED 1511 toward the player side (the front side of the light guide unit 1501). As a result, when the light P is emitted from the LED 1511, the player can visually recognize the symbol 1505 formed in the “super” shape by the light R polarized by the aggregate of the concave portions 1701. Such a recess 1701 can be formed, for example, by irradiating the back surface 1710 of the light guide unit 1501 with laser light and etching it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17B, instead of the concave portion 1701, a polarization portion 1711 that polarizes the light P (may be referred to as refraction or reflection) is formed inside the light guide portion 1501, The portion 1505 can also emit light. The polarization portion 1711 is a scratch-like portion having a regular surface formed inside the light guide unit 1501. As a result, when the light P is emitted from the LED 1511, the player can visually recognize the symbol 1505 formed in a “super” shape by the light R polarized by the assembly of the polarization portions 1711. Such a polarized portion 1711 can be formed, for example, by irradiating the inside of the light guide unit 1501 with laser light and positioning the focal point of the laser beam on the polarized portion 1711.

  C2 part in FIG. 15 includes each part of symbol 1503 and symbol 1505. Similar to the C1 portion described above, the light P emitted from the LED 1511 is polarized in the concave portion 1701, and is visually recognized as a part of the symbol 1505 by the light R on the player side. Further, the light emitted from the back side of the drawing to the front side by the LED 1521 is polarized by the concave portion 1702 and is visually recognized as a part of the symbol 1503 by the light R on the player side. Each concave portion 1702 includes a reflective surface that easily reflects light emitted from the LED 1521 toward the player side (the front side of the light guide unit 1501). In FIG. 17C, the reflecting surface is preferably a surface facing from the back direction to the middle in the left direction.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 17D, the light guide unit 1501 may be a stack of a first light guide unit 1714 and a second light guide unit 1715. In such a case, for example, a concave portion 1701 can be formed on the back surface 1710 of the first light guide portion 1714, and a concave portion 1702 can be formed on the back surface 1716 of the second light guide portion 1715. As a result, the light P from the LED 1511 is polarized in the recess 1701. The polarized light R passes through the first light guide 1717 and the second light guide 1715, and is visually recognized on the player side (the surface 1720 side of the second light guide 1715). Further, light from the LED 1521 is polarized in the concave portion 1702. The polarized light R passes through the second light guide portion 1715 and is visually recognized on the player side.

  In the above example, the concave portion 1701 and the concave portion 1702 are formed on the back surface 1710 of the first light guide portion 1714 and the back surface 1716 of the second light guide portion 1715, respectively. However, the positions where the concave portions 1701 and the concave portions 1702 are formed are not limited to the above positions. For example, the concave portion 1701 may be formed on the front surface of the first light guide portion 1714 (the surface on the opposite side of the back surface 1710). In addition, the concave portion 1702 may be formed on the surface 1720 side of the second light guide portion 1715. Further, instead of forming the concave portion 1701, the polarizing portion 1711 described with reference to FIG. 17B may be formed inside the first light guide portion 1714. Similarly, instead of forming the concave portion 1702, a polarization portion similar to the polarization portion 1711 may be formed inside the second light guide portion 1715. Alternatively, the light guide unit 1501 may be formed by stacking three or more light guide units, and the concave portions 1701 and 1702 or the polarization portion 1711 may be formed in each of the light guide units.

  FIG. 18 shows that the pattern 1505 emits light by the emission of light P from the LED 1511 on the substrate 1510 to the light guide 1510 and the pattern 1502 by the emission of light P from the LED 1521 on the substrate 1520 to the light guide 1510. Each of ˜1504 emits light (B).

  When the LED 1511 is turned on, the light P travels on the back surface of the light guide portion 1501 and a region slightly inward thereof, and is polarized in the concave portion 1701 forming the pattern 1505, and the light guide portion 1501 has a thickness direction. It is perceived by the player in the shape of “super”. In FIG. 18A, in order to show that the portion of the symbol 1505 emits light, it is drawn in black, and the other symbols 1502 to 1504 are not drawn.

  On the other hand, when the LED 1521 is turned on, the light P illuminates the back surface of the light guide unit 1501, is polarized in the concave portions 1702 forming the symbols 1502 to 1504, and is transmitted in the thickness direction of the light guide unit 1501. In addition, it is visually recognized in the form of many lines. In FIG. 18B, the symbols 1502 to 1504 are drawn in black to indicate that light is emitted, and the other symbols 1505 are not drawn.

  In the above description of the light emission mode, only the LED 1511 disposed above the light guide 1501 in front view emits light to emit the symbol 1505, and only the LED 1521 disposed on the left side of the light guide 1501 in front view emits light. As a result, the patterns 1502 to 1504 are completely separated from each other. However, all the LEDs 1511 and all the LEDs 1521 may emit light at the same time. In that case, both the symbol 1505 and the symbols 1502-1503 emit light. When only a part of the LED 1521 emits light, only the symbol 1502, the symbol 1503, the symbol 1504, the symbol 1502 and the symbol 1503, the symbol 1502 and the symbol 1504, or the symbol 1503 and the symbol 1504 are combined. It can also emit light. Furthermore, when the light emission of the LED 1511 is combined therewith, it is possible to emit both a part of the above-described linear designs 1502 to 1504 and the “super” character design 1505.

  In this way, by controlling the light emission timing of the plurality of LEDs 1511 and the plurality of LEDs 1521, the light emission and quenching of the linear symbols 1502 to 1504 are added to the light emission and quenching of the “super” character 1505, By flashing the word “super” and lines of various thicknesses, it is possible to realize a light-emitting display that further enhances the game taste. Such symbols 1502 to 1505 are preferably emitted in association with display of decorative symbols by the main display device 131. When the numbers are arranged in the decorative design, various light emission forms such as the design 1505 emitting light or blinking with high brightness can be used.

  Further, for example, a thin line-shaped pattern 1504 is formed in a recess 1702 deeper than the other line patterns 1502 and 1503, or an LED 1521 fixed at a position where the pattern 1504 emits light is an LED having a higher brightness than the other LEDs 1521. Then, only the symbol 1504 can emit light with higher luminance than the other symbols 1502 and 1503. Further, if only a part (one or two or more) of the plurality of recesses 1702 arranged in the length direction of the pattern 1504 is formed deeply, the deeply formed recesses 1702 are more than the other recesses 1702. Light can be emitted with high brightness. This makes it possible to emit light with high brightness at portions of the single line symbol 1504. The same applies to the other symbols 1502, 1503, 1505. Thereby, it is possible to produce a glittering feeling. For example, if only the concave portion 1701 that forms the contour of the “super” character 1505 is formed deeper than the other concave portions 1701, the “super” contour portion can emit light with high brightness. Further, when the concave portion 1701 in the right region is formed deeper than the concave portion 1701 in the left region in front view of the character “super”, the right side of the character “super” emits light with higher luminance. Such a change in luminance can also be realized by causing a part of the LED 1511 to emit light with higher luminance.

[Adjustment of illumination mode using lens unit]
FIG. 19 shows a rear view of a light guide unit 1900 as a modification of the light guide unit 181 of FIG. 15 and an enlarged view of a part thereof.

  A light guide unit 1900 according to a modification includes a lens member 1910 facing the light emitting surfaces of the plurality of LEDs 1521 fixed to the substrate 1520. For this reason, the light guide unit 1900 does not include the lens cover 1530 provided in the light guide unit 181 of FIG. The light P emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 1521 passes through the lens member 1910 in the width direction and illuminates the vicinity of the back surface of the light guide unit 1501. As a result, the symbols 1502 to 1504 emit light.

  On the other hand, no lens member is disposed on the light emitting surface of the LED 1511 fixed to the substrate 1510. For this reason, the light P emitted from the LED 1511 directly illuminates the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 and slightly enters the inside from the back surface. As a result, the symbol 1505 emits light.

  As shown in the enlarged view of the E part in FIG. 19, the lens member 1910 is an elongated transparent plate disposed along the length direction of the substrate 1520. In the lens member 1910, the surface on the side facing or facing the side end surface of the substrate 1520 has a substantially linear end surface. The light P emitted from the LED 1521 enters the lens member 1910 from the substantially linear end surface. The surface of the lens member 1910 opposite to the substantially linear end surface is an uneven end surface including a large number of arc-shaped convex portions 1911. In this embodiment, one convex portion 1911 is located in the direction in which the light P of the LED 1521 is emitted. For this reason, the light P emitted from the LED 1521 enters the inside from the substantially planar end surface of the lens member 1910 and exits from the convex portion 1911. However, the light P of two or more LEDs 1521 may be emitted from one convex portion 1911. The lens member 1910 provided with a large number of convex portions 1911 functions as a plano-convex lens in which the opposite side of the convex portions 1911 is flat. Therefore, after the light P from the LED 1521 passes through the inside of the lens member 1910, it is condensed so as to reduce the width of the light, and the symbols 1502-1504 of the light guide unit 1501 are emitted. The lens member 1910 can concentrate lightly even if the light emitting surface of the LED 1521 is relatively wide. For this reason, even when there are a plurality of symbols 1504 having the narrowest width, only a part of the symbols 1504 can emit light. Further, by concentrating the light P thinly by the lens member 1910, it is possible to realize light emission with higher luminance such as the symbol 1504.

  FIG. 20 is a view for explaining a lens member 2000 according to a modification of the lens member 1910 of FIG.

  A lens member 2000 according to the modification of FIG. 19 has a first convex region 2000a in which one or two or more deep convex portions 1911 having a small radius of curvature are arranged in the length direction, and a radius of curvature more than the convex portion 1911. A second convex region 2000b in which one or two or more shallow convex portions 2011 having a large arc are arranged, and a substantially planar region 2000c having almost no unevenness are sequentially provided adjacent to each other in the length direction. Among the plurality of LEDs fixed along the length direction of the substrate 1520, the LED 1521 is positioned substantially in the horizontal direction of each convex portion 1911 of the first convex region 2000a. Moreover, LED2021 is located in the substantially horizontal direction of each convex part 2011 of the 2nd convex part area | region 2000b. Further, two or more LEDs 2022 are disposed so as to face the substantially planar region 2000c. In this embodiment, two or more LEDs 1521, LEDs 2021, and LEDs 2022 are provided on the substrate 1520. However, at least one of the LED 1521, the LED 2021, and the LED 2022 may be only one. The interval between the LEDs 1521 corresponds to the interval between the convex portions 1911. The interval between the LEDs 2021 corresponds to the interval between the convex portions 2011. On the other hand, the interval between the LEDs 2022 is determined without any particular limitation.

  The first convex region 2000a of the lens member 2000 includes a convex portion 1911 having an arc with the smallest radius of curvature. For this reason, the light P emitted from the LED 1521 can illuminate the symbols 1502 to 1504 in the most condensed state (condensed state P1). For this reason, when it is desired to emit light with high brightness, the pattern 1504 in which concave portions or polarizing portions 2050 formed on the back surface of the light guide portion 1501 are arranged in a row (may be two or more rows), the light from the convex portion 1911 to the LED 1521 is emitted. P is preferably emitted.

  The second convex region 2000b of the lens member 2000 includes a convex portion 2011 having an arc having a larger radius of curvature than the convex portion 1911. For this reason, the light P emitted from the LED 2021 can illuminate the symbols 1502 to 1504 in a state where the light P is collected wider than the above-described P1 (condensed state P2). For this reason, when it is desired to emit light with a high luminance in the pattern 1503 in which the concave portions or the polarization portions 2050 formed on the back surface of the light guide portion 1501 are arranged in the width direction more than the design 1504, the light P from the convex portion 2011 to the LED 2021 is emitted. It is preferable to emit light.

  The substantially planar region 2000c of the lens member 2000 is a substantially planar region having almost no unevenness. For this reason, the light P emitted from the LED 2022 diffuses naturally (state P3). For this reason, when it is desired to emit light with a high luminance from the pattern 1502 in which the concave portions or the polarization portions 2050 formed on the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 are arranged in the width direction more than the pattern 1503, the light of the LED 2022 from the substantially planar region 2000c. P is preferably emitted.

  FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a lens member 2100 according to another modified example different from the lens member 2000 of FIG.

  A lens member 2100 according to the modified example of FIG. 21 is continuously provided with a deep convex portion 2111 having a small radius of curvature in the length direction thereof, and a shallow convex portion 2112 having a larger radius of curvature than the convex portion 2111. Are continuously provided on the opposite side of the convex portion 2111. The lens member 2100 is disposed on the inner side of the substrate 1520 so that the convex portion 2112 side with a shallow arc is opposed to the substrate 1520 with a gap therebetween. The interval between the LEDs 2020 corresponds to the interval between the convex portions 2111 (or the interval between the convex portions 2112). Light emitted from the LED 2020 on the substrate 1520 enters from the convex portion 2112, passes through the inside of the lens member 2100 in the width direction, and is emitted from the convex portion 2111. Since both convex portions 2112 and 2111 of the lens member 2100 have a function of a convex lens, the light emitted from the LED 2020 is condensed by the lens member 2100 as shown in the enlarged view of the F portion in FIG. State P4), the pattern formed on the back surface of the light guide unit 1501 is caused to emit light. The lens member 2100 can also be arranged with the convex portion 2111 having a deep arc facing the LED 2022 side.

  The convex portion 2111 of the lens member 2100 can include one or more slits 2150 substantially parallel to the thickness direction of the lens member 2100 when viewed from the direction of the arrow G. The slit 2150 has a role of making the traveling direction of light from the LED 2020 more linear. For this reason, even if the light emitted from the LED 2020 travels so as to slightly widen the width, the lens member 2100 can travel along the slit 2150 without refracting the light therein. In addition to the convex lens or plano-convex lens exemplified above, a concave lens or a plano-concave lens for diffusing light can also be suitably used as the lens member. When a concave lens or a plano-concave lens is used, light from a highly directional LED can be diffused to emit a wide range of symbols in the light guide unit 1501.

[Description of the structure of the grand prize winning device]
FIG. 22 is a partially enlarged front view (A) of the state in which the movable piece 117b of the conventional first grand prize winning device 2210 is about to close, and the first big prize winning device 2210 in the state of being closed from the direction of arrow H. A partially enlarged side view (B) and a partially enlarged front view (C) of a state where a plurality of game balls B are clogged near the entrance of the winning opening 2203 while the movable piece 117b is open are shown. Here, the game ball in the figure will be referred to as “game ball B” as appropriate.

  First, the configuration of a conventional first big prize device 2210 will be described with reference to FIG. The conventional first grand prize winning device 2210 includes a movable piece 117b and a winning opening 2203. The winning opening 2203 includes a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball B in the middle of the passage. Here, an area where the sensor can detect the passage of the game ball B is referred to as a game ball detection area 2200. When the game ball B passes the game ball detection area 2200, one game ball B has won the first grand prize winning device 2210.

  As described above, the movable piece 117b is in an open state at the time of a big hit, and is closed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is, for example, the passage of a predetermined time or the entry of a predetermined number of game balls B. Assuming that one round is from the opening operation to the closing operation of the movable piece 117b, the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 117b is executed, for example, 16 rounds. When the movable piece 117b is closed, the upper surface of the movable piece 117b functions as a passage (referred to as a “first passage”) 2201 for the game ball B. For this reason, it is preferable that the movable piece 117b is inclined in the moving direction of the game ball B. In this embodiment, the respective positions of the inclined upper end portion and the inclined lower end portion on the back side of the inclined surface of the movable piece 117b are defined as K1 and K2, respectively. When the movable piece 117b is closed, the game ball B not only rolls in the first passage 2201, but can also move to the left side (the side closer to the center of the game board 102A) from the upper end of the movable piece 117b. In such a case, the game ball B moves downward in a passage on the left side of the winning opening 2203 (referred to as “second passage”) 2204 (a surface inclined in the lower left direction in FIG. 22). To do. Note that the second passage 2204 is not interpreted as a passage, but can be interpreted as a wall portion 2204 as one constituent member forming the winning opening 2203.

  On the other hand, when the movable piece 117b is opened, the movable piece 117b is retracted to the back surface (back surface) side of the game board 102A. Therefore, in the right-handed state, the game ball B moves in the direction of the black arrow in (A). Enter the winning entrance 2203.

  Here, the second passage 2204 reaches a position equal to or higher than the position of the movable piece 117b, more specifically, the position K1 of the inclined upper end portion of the lower surface 2202 of the movable piece 117b. This is because it also has a function as a wall that makes it easy to put the game ball B into the winning opening 2203. However, as shown in (A) and (B), when the movable piece 117b is accidentally closed, the game ball B is in front of the movable piece 117b, the player-side glass member 151, and the upper part of the passage 2204. Sometimes it gets caught between. When the game ball B is sandwiched between the movable pieces 117b that are about to close, the state is maintained until the movable pieces 117b are opened in the next round.

  In addition, even when the movable piece 117b is in an open state, as shown in (C), a state in which the game ball B is clogged upstream of the stuffed prize opening 2203 can occur. That is, when two or more game balls B move to the winning opening 2203 almost simultaneously, the gaming balls B are clogged near the entrance of the winning opening 2203 due to the height of the second passage 2204. There is a case. In such a case, the blockage of the winning hole 2203 may be resolved by the collision of the next moving game ball B, but in the worst case, the blockage may not be resolved at all. The black arrow in (C) has the same meaning as that in (A).

  The clogging of the game ball B exemplified in both cases (A), (B) and (C) means that a smooth flow of the game ball B to the winning port 2203 or other places is not guaranteed. To do. For this reason, the designer of the gaming machine 100 has to set a longer time fluctuation after taking into account the probability of such trouble. For this reason, the interest of the game has been reduced. In addition, the situation in which the game ball B is clogged in the first grand prize winning device 2210 may cause the player to have an unpleasant feeling apart from setting the time fluctuation to be longer.

  FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front view (A) for explaining the movement of the game ball B in a state where the movable piece 117b of the first grand prize winning device 117 according to this embodiment is closed, and the movable piece 117b is opened. The partially enlarged front view (B) for demonstrating the motion of the game ball B in the state which exists is shown, respectively.

  In order to solve the conventional problems as described above, the first grand prize winning device 117 in this embodiment employs a structure that lowers the position of the second passage 2204 as shown in FIG. Here, the winning opening 2203 is a passage formed by a wall portion 2300 that faces a portion (also referred to as a wall portion 2204) forming the second passage 2204 in front view.

  When the movable piece 117b is closed, the game ball B moves in two directions indicated by white arrows as shown in (A). That is, the game ball B moves to both the left and right sides so as to avoid the first big prize winning device 117. On the other hand, when the movable piece 117b is opened, the game ball B moves in the direction of the black arrow in (B) and enters the winning opening 2203. At this time, whether or not the blockage as shown in FIG. Since the second passage 2204 exists at a low position as indicated by the broken-line arrow in FIG. For this reason, the game ball B toward the winning port 2203 enters the winning port 2203 as it is and passes through the game ball detection area 2200 or passes over the second passage 2204 without entering the winning port 2203. Head downward from

  Further, there is a possibility that the game ball B is sandwiched between the movable piece 117b and the glass member 151 that are about to close, as in the conventional case shown in FIGS. However, since the second passage 2204 is at a position sufficiently lower than the conventional one, it does not have a function of supporting the lower part of the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B that is about to be sandwiched by the movable piece 117b that is about to close is easily pulled downward.

  Here, the first passage 2201 is located above the winning opening 2203 and upstream of the direction in which the game ball B flows. The second passage 2204 is located downstream of the first passage 2201 in the direction in which the game ball B flows. The upper surface of the second passage 2204 is at a position lower than the lower surface 2202 of the first passage 2201. More preferably, the second passage 2204 is at a position lower than the position K2 of the inclined lower end portion on the lower surface 2202 of the first passage 2201. The uppermost end 2321 of the second passage 2204 is preferably at a position higher by the length M than the entrance edge 2320 of the game ball B at the boundary between the upper surface of the wall 2300 and the winning opening 2203. The length M is more preferably equal to or smaller than the radius d of the game ball B. It is also possible to make the uppermost end 2321 too lower than the entrance edge 2320. However, in that case, the probability that the game ball B moves downward on the second passage 2204 without entering the winning opening 2203 is increased, which is not preferable. The most preferred uppermost end 2321 is in a form that is higher than the entrance edge 2320 and projects above the entrance edge 2320 by a length M that does not exceed the radius d of the game ball B. As a result, in a state where the movable piece 117b is open, the game ball B easily enters the winning opening 2203 and is less likely to be clogged near the entrance of the winning opening 2203.

  The larger the distance L between the uppermost end 2321 of the second passage 2204 and the position K1 of the inclined upper end of the lower surface 2202 of the movable piece 117b, the larger the movable piece 117b, the glass member 151, and the second The possibility that the game ball B is sandwiched between the passage 2204 is reduced. The distance L is preferably a distance larger than the radius d of the game ball B. Thereby, even if the equator portion of the game ball B is at the position of the front end surface of the movable piece 117b, the uppermost end 2321 is below the position of the lower end surface of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is supported from below. Absent. Therefore, the state sandwiched between the game ball B movable pieces 117b is less likely to occur.

  However, it is preferable that the distance L (corresponding to a gap from the lower surface 2202 of the first passage 2201 to the upper surface of the second passage 2204) is a size that does not allow the game ball B to enter. If the distance L is too large, even when the movable piece 117b is closed, there is a possibility that the game ball B may accidentally enter the winning hole 2203 through the gap between the lower surface 2202 and the uppermost end 2321 of the second passage 2204. Because it increases.

  The structure of the first grand prize winning device 117 can be applied to the second starting device 115 or the second grand prize winning device 127. As a result, the risk of the game ball B being clogged during each opening / closing operation of the movable piece 115b of the second starter 115 or the movable piece 127b of the second grand prize winning device 127 can be reduced.

[Description of Logo Unit 171]
As shown in FIG. 25, the logo unit 171 includes a logo panel 2501 that covers the front surface of the substrate 1510 of the light guide unit 181 (see FIG. 15).
FIG. 24 shows a state where the logo panel 2501 of the logo unit 171 is removed. A number of LED light sources 2401 are provided on the front surface of the substrate 1510 of the light guide unit 181. Each LED light source 2401 is arranged to face a letter-shaped lens 2502 (see FIG. 25) provided on the logo panel 2501, and the light emitted from each LED light source 2401 is visible from the outside through each lens 2502. It has become.

[Description of Big Gun Unit 154]
The big gun unit 154 is shown in FIGS. The big gun unit 154 includes a base portion 2601, a first movable unit 2602, a second movable unit 2603, a link 2604, a drive motor 2605, a gear unit 2701, and a return spring 3301.
As shown in FIG. 25, the big gun unit 154 is provided behind the logo unit 171, and at least a standby position hidden in the logo unit 171 (the position in FIG. 25A) and a portion hidden in the logo unit 171. It is possible to move between a visible position (a position shown in FIG. 25 (B)) at which a part is visible from the player and to be deformable. When the big gun unit 154 moves from the standby position to the visually recognizable position, the big gun unit 154 can move to the visually recognizable position after completing the deformation. The big gun unit 154 of the present embodiment is deformed (deployed) so that the second movable unit 2603 spreads the fan from the first movable unit 2602, but the deformation mode is not limited to this.

  In the standby position, even if the front panel 2504 of the light emitting section 2503 of the first movable unit 2602 of the big gun unit 154 and the front panel 2507 of the light emitting section 2506 of the second movable unit 2603 are completely hidden behind the logo unit 171. It may be good or a part may be visible as shown in FIG. Further, in the visible position, the surface panel 2504 of the light emitting unit 2503 of the first movable unit 2602 of the big gun unit 154 and the surface panel 2507 of the light emitting unit 2506 of the second movable unit 2603 may be completely visible, or a part thereof. May be hidden behind the logo unit 171.

  The base portion 2601 is fixed at a predetermined position on the inner frame 170. A drive motor 2605, a gear unit 2701, a first movable unit 2602, and a link 2604 are attached to the base portion 2601. In the base portion 2601, a first central shaft 2702 that is a rotation center of the arm 2606 of the first movable unit 2602, a guide shaft 2703 that guides the first movable unit 2602, and a second center that is the rotation center of the link 2604. A central axis 2607 is provided.

The first movable unit 2602 is provided with an arm 2606, and the tip of the arm 2606 is rotatably attached to the first central shaft 2702 of the base portion 2601.
The first movable unit 2602 is provided with a movement guide long hole 2704, a deployment center shaft 2705, a first deployment guide shaft 2706, a second deployment guide shaft 2707, and a drive slot 2608. . The movement guide long hole 2704 has an arc shape centered on the first central axis 2702 of the base portion 2601, and the guide shaft 2703 of the base portion 2601 is inserted therein. Therefore, the first movable unit 2602 is rotatable about the first central shaft 2702 within a range in which the guide shaft 2703 moves in the movement guide long hole 2704.

A light emitting unit 2503 is provided on the front surface of the first movable unit 2602.
In FIG. 31, the light emission part 2503 of the 1st movable unit 2602 is shown. (A) is the front view, and (B) is a front view with the front panel 2504 removed. An LED substrate 3101 is provided in the light emitting unit 2503, and a number of LED light sources 3102 are provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 3101. The LED light source 3102 is disposed so as to face a lens 2505 provided on the front panel 2504, and light emitted from each LED light source 3102 is visible to the player through each lens 2505.

The second movable unit 2603 is rotatably attached to the deployment center shaft 2705 of the first movable unit 2602.
The second movable unit 2603 is provided with a first deployment guide slot 2708, a second deployment guide slot 2709, and a swing center shaft 2710. The first deployment guide shaft 2706 of the first movable unit 2602 is inserted into the first deployment guide slot 2708, and the second deployment guide shaft 2707 of the first movable unit 2602 is inserted into the second deployment guide slot 2709. Has been. The first deployment guide slot 2708 and the second deployment guide slot 2709 have an arc shape centered on the deployment center axis 2705 of the first movable unit 2602. The first deployment guide slot 2708 is provided inside the second deployment guide slot 2709. Therefore, in the second movable unit 2603, the first deployment guide shaft 2706 can move in the first deployment guide slot 2708, and the second deployment guide shaft 2707 can move in the second deployment guide slot 2709. In a range, the first movable unit 2602 can be rotated around the deployment center axis 2705. That is, the second movable unit 2603 can be rotated so as to spread the fan from the first movable unit 2602.

A light emitting unit 2506 is provided on the front surface of the second movable unit 2603.
FIG. 32 shows the light emitting unit 2506 of the second movable unit 2603. (A) is the front view, and (B) is a front view with the front panel 2507 removed. An LED substrate 3201 is provided in the light emitting unit 2506, and a number of LED light sources 3202 are provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 3201. The LED light source 3202 is disposed to face a lens 2508 provided on the front panel 2507, and light emitted from each LED light source 3202 can be visually recognized by the player through each lens 2508.

The link 2604 is rotatably attached to the second central shaft 2607 of the base portion 2601. The link 2604 is provided with a swing guide slot 2711 for swinging the second movable unit 2603, and the swing center shaft 2710 of the second movable unit 2603 is inserted into the swing guide slot 2711. .
FIG. 33 shows a state where the return spring 3301 is attached. The return spring 3301 is provided between the base portion 2601 and the first movable unit 2602, and always exerts an urging force in the direction in which the first movable unit 2602 is pulled up, that is, toward the standby position.

FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 show the gear unit 2701 and the drive motor 2605. The gear unit 2701 includes a first gear 2712 rotated by the drive motor 2605, a second gear 2713 rotated by the first gear 2712, and a third gear 2714 rotated by the second gear 2713. A base portion 2601 is rotatably attached.
As shown in detail in FIG. 34, the third gear 2714 is provided with a large-diameter portion 3401 having an operation arm 3401a. 2608 is inserted. The third gear 2714 is provided with a position detecting protrusion 3401b, and the protrusion 3401b can be detected by a position detecting sensor 3402.
The drive motor 2605 is fixed at a predetermined position of the base portion 2601.

  FIG. 34 shows how the rotation of the drive motor 2605 is transmitted to the drive shaft 2609 of the third gear 2714. The rotation position of the third gear 2714 shown by the solid line in the drawing is the position where the big gun unit 154 is moved to the standby position. From this state, when the drive motor 2605 rotates in the forward direction, the third gear 2714 rotates in the direction of arrow C in the drawing, and the arm 2606 is lowered while the drive shaft 2609 moves within the drive slot 2608.

27 to 30 show how the big gun unit 154 moves from the standby position to the visually recognizable position.
When the drive motor 2605 rotates in the forward direction from the standby position in FIG. 27, the drive shaft 2609 is lowered while moving in the drive long hole 2608 of the first movable unit 2602. The first movable unit 2602 rotates about the first central axis 2702 and descends. Since the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are connected by the development center shaft 2705, the second movable unit 2603 is also lowered integrally. At this time, the second movable unit 2603 measures the weight of the first movable unit 2602 by its own weight, and the relative positional relationship between the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 does not change. That is, gravity acts on the second movable unit 2603 connected to the first movable unit 2602 by the development center shaft 2705 in the direction in which the second movable unit 2603 is applied to the first movable unit 2602, so that the first movable The relative positional relationship between the unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 does not change. The second movable unit 2603 descends while rotating the link 2604 downward about the second central axis 2607.
The drive motor 2605 lowers the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 against the spring force of the return spring 3301.

  Then, when the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are lowered to the position shown in FIG. The lowering of the second movable unit 2603 is suppressed. Accordingly, the second movable unit 2603 starts to rotate around the deployment center axis 2705 with respect to the first movable unit 2602 that continues to descend. That is, the second movable unit 2603 starts to spread like a fan with respect to the first movable unit 2602 (deformation start).

  Furthermore, when the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are lowered to the position shown in FIG. 29 and the second movable unit 2603 spreads (expands) like a fan with respect to the first movable unit 2602, the first The first deployment guide shaft 2706 and the second deployment guide shaft 2707 of the movable unit 2602 reach the ends of the first deployment guide slot 2708 and the second deployment guide slot 2709 of the second movable unit 2603, respectively. Therefore, the rotation of the second movable unit 2603 about the deployment center axis 2705 with respect to the first movable unit 2602 is completed (deformation is completed), and thereafter the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are integrally lowered. To do. That is, it continues to descend toward the visible position.

  When the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 move to the visually recognizable position in FIG. 30, the drive motor 2605 is turned off. For example, the position detection sensor 3402 that has detected the protruding piece 3401b at the standby position rotates the driving motor 2605 in a predetermined number of steps after the driving motor 2605 does not detect the protruding piece 3401b. After or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the drive motor 2605 is turned off.

  In this way, the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are deployed (deformed) behind the logo unit 171, and after completing the deployment, reach the visible position. Therefore, the player cannot see or hardly see the development process of the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603. That is, it seems to the player that a fan-shaped accessory is provided on the back of the logo unit 171 and that the fan-shaped accessory simply descends. Therefore, a new production that has never been possible is possible, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, at the visible position, the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are shown in a fan-shaped state (expanded) under the logo panel 2501, so that the big gun unit 154 is circular from the player. It seems that a part of it is peeking under the logo panel 2501. That is, it appears that the upper part of the circular movable accessory is hidden behind the logo panel 2501. Therefore, it is possible to produce a new production that has never existed before, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  Each LED light source 2401 of the logo unit 171 and each of the LED light sources 3102 and 3202 of the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 (that is, the big gun unit 154) are individually lit or blinked or their colors are changed. The production using the logo unit 171 and the production using the big gun unit 154 may be independent from each other, but the LED light sources 2401 of the logo unit 171 and the LED light sources 3102 and 3202 of the big gun unit 154 are combined together. The effect using the logo unit 171 and the effect using the big gun unit 154 may be linked by lighting or blinking, changing the color, flashing in synchronization, or changing the color. By performing the production in which the logo unit 171 and the big gun unit 154 are linked, a new production that has never existed can be realized, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  On the other hand, when raising the 1st movable unit 2602 and the 2nd movable unit 2603 from the visually recognizable position of FIG. 30, the drive motor 2605 should just reverse. When the drive motor 2605 is reversed, the first operation unit 2602 and the second operation unit 2603 are raised to the standby position by performing the above operations in reverse. Then, when the position detection sensor 3402 detects the protruding piece 3401b of the third gear 2714, it is detected that the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 have reached the standby position, and the drive motor 2605 is turned off. The

  Since a return spring 3301 is provided between the base portion 2601 and the first movable unit 2602 to constantly urge the first movable unit 2602 toward the standby position, the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2602 are provided. When the movable unit 2603 is raised, the spring force of the return spring 3301 works as an auxiliary force for the driving force of the driving motor 2605. Therefore, it is possible to employ a smaller drive motor 2605.

[Description of first gun unit 155]
FIG. 35 shows the main part of the first gun unit 155. The first gun unit 155 includes a base portion 3501 fixed at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170, a unit main body 3502 that is rotatably attached to the base portion 3501, and a rotation mechanism that rotates the unit main body 3502. (Not shown).

As shown in FIG. 35, a rotation center shaft 3503 is provided on the rear side surface of the unit main body 3502, and this rotation center shaft 3503 is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) provided in the base portion 3501. Thus, the unit main body 3502 is rotatable with respect to the base portion 3501.
Further, on the rear side surface of the unit main body 3502, a first guide long hole 3504 and a slide shaft portion 3505 that can move in the first guide long hole 3504 are provided. The slide shaft portion 3505 is inserted into a second guide long hole 3506 provided in the base portion 3501. Accordingly, the unit main body 3502 rotates with respect to the base portion 3501 while moving the slide shaft portion 3505 within the second guide long hole 3506.

FIG. 36A shows the second guide long hole 3506 of the base portion 3501. The distance from the inner end IS of the second guide long hole 3506 to the rotation center axis 3503 is longer than the distance from the outer end OS of the second guide long hole 3506 to the rotation center axis 3503. Therefore, when the unit main body 3502 rotates from the standby position toward the protruding position, the slide shaft portion 3505 moves in the first guide slot 3504 from the position shown in FIG. 35A to the position shown in FIG. Moving. The movement of the slide shaft portion 3505 with respect to the first guide long hole 3504 is transmitted to the distal end portion of the unit main body 3502 by a link mechanism (not shown), and the four movable portions 3507 are expanded (FIG. 35B).
A rack 3508 is attached to the unit main body 3502. A gear 3509 is engaged with the rack 3508, and the unit main body 3502 is rotated with respect to the base portion 3501 by rotating the gear 3509 with a drive motor (not shown).

[Description of Second Gun Unit 156]
The second gun unit 156 has a symmetrical structure with respect to the first gun unit 155. That is, the first gun unit 155 provided on the right side of the game area 106 is configured to rotate the unit main body 3502 to the left side (FIG. 36 is a rear view and is drawn to be tilted to the right side). The second gun unit 156 provided on the left side of the game area 106 has a structure in which the unit main body 3601 is rotated to the right side (FIG. 36 is a rear view and is drawn to be tilted to the left side). .
Note that the configuration for rotating the unit main body 3601 of the second gun unit 156 is the same as the configuration for rotating the unit main body 3502 of the first gun unit 155, and thus the description of the configuration of the second gun unit 156 is omitted. To do.

[Description of Ball Unit 161]
The ball unit 161 is shown in FIGS. The ball unit 161 includes a cover plate 3701, a character plate 3801, an LED substrate 3802, and a light guide unit 3702.
As shown in FIG. 38, an LED substrate 3802 and a character plate 3801 are attached to the front surface of the light guide 3702. At this time, the character plate 3801 is attached to the light guide 3702 so as to cover the LED substrate 3802. A plurality of LED light sources 3803 and 3703 are provided on the front surface and the back surface of the LED substrate 3802, respectively. An LED light source 3803 (hereinafter also referred to as a front LED light source 3803) provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 3802 irradiates light toward the character plate 3801, and an LED light source 3703 (hereinafter referred to as a rear LED light source) provided on the back surface of the LED substrate 3802. Side LED light source 3703) emits light toward the radially outer side of the ball unit 161.

A cover plate 3701 is attached to the front surface of the character plate 3801. The cover plate 3701 is, for example, a semi-transparent member colored in a relatively dark color, and the back surface is textured (processed into a fine rough surface).
The character plate 3801 includes a display character forming portion 3804 that is three-dimensionally curved so as to form a part of a dome shape, and a partition portion 4001 provided in a space inside the curved display character forming portion 3804. These are integrally molded. The display character forming portion 3804 is provided with a notch window 3805 having a predetermined shape. In the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout windows 3805 having a predetermined character shape and a cutout window 3805 constituting a display portion of a 7-segment display for expressing numbers are provided.

  The front LED light source 3803 provided on the LED substrate 3802 corresponds to the cutout window 3805 of the display character forming portion 3804, and covers the light that has passed through the cutout window 3805 by causing the front LED light source 3803 to emit light. Can be applied to plate 3701. This light can be confirmed from the outside of the cover plate 3701 because the cover plate 3701 is translucent. Therefore, by turning on / off the front LED light source 3803 corresponding to the cutout window 3805, a predetermined character or a desired number can be displayed on the cover plate 3701.

The space between the notch window 3805 and the front LED light source 3803 corresponding to the notch window 3805 is partitioned by the partition portion 4001 for each notch window 3805, and the light of the front LED light source 3803 is adjacent to the notch. The window 3805 cannot be reached. Therefore, only the characters and numbers that are desired to be displayed are displayed on the cover plate 3701, and it is possible to prevent the characters and numbers that are not desired to be displayed slightly.
In addition, since the back surface of the cover plate 3701 is textured, it is possible to prevent the light received from the front LED light source 3803 from being blurred and concentrated to one point to become bright. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness depending on the location in the characters and numbers displayed on the cover plate 3701, and it is possible to display characters having the same level of brightness as a whole.

  The light guide portion 3702 in this embodiment is preferably a plate material made of a transparent resin plate or glass plate. However, the light guide portion 3702 is colorless and transparent or colored and transparent, is in a translucent state with low transparency, or is in a clear state with high transparency, and further has a thickness in the front and back direction. It does not matter whether the plate material is extremely small compared to the length in the vertical and horizontal directions or the block material whose thickness in this direction does not change significantly compared to the length in the vertical and horizontal directions.

The light guide portion 3702 has a substantially semicircular shape, and the outer peripheral edge thereof protrudes from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate 3701 to form an arc-shaped protruding portion 3704.
FIG. 42A shows a cross section of the ball unit 161 around the protrusion 3704. In FIG. 42, the character plate 3801 is not shown. The rear LED light source 3703 is disposed in a notch 3705 provided in the light guide 3702 and irradiates light toward the protrusion 3704. The rear surface of the protruding portion 3704 is an inclined surface 4201, and the thickness of the protruding portion 3704 is gradually reduced toward the outer peripheral edge. A large number of narrow grooves 4202 are provided radially on the inclined surface 4201 of the protrusion 3704. Therefore, light emitted from the rear LED light source 3703 passes through the light guide 3702 and is guided to the inclined surface 4201 of the protrusion 3704 and is diffusely reflected in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 100 by the narrow groove 4202. That is, it appears to the player that the protrusion 3704 is emitting light. Accordingly, the protruding portion 3704 can function as a transmissive display portion or a lens.

As shown in FIG. 37B, a plurality of combinations of the rear LED light source 3703 and the notch 3705 are provided in a circular arc shape along the protrusion 3704 at a predetermined interval.
FIG. 43 shows a rear LED light source 3703 and a notch 3705. A semicircular recess 4301 is provided at a position where the light of the notch 3705 is irradiated. Therefore, as indicated by an arrow in the figure, the light emitted from the rear LED light source 3703 can be diffused radially by the concave portion 4301, and the plurality of rear LED light sources 3703 provided at predetermined intervals can project the projection 3704. The whole can be illuminated almost uniformly. The outline of the ball unit 161 can be raised by making the protrusion 3704 shine. The outline (protruding portion 3704) of the ball unit 161, which will be described later, is lit and the color is changed, or according to the effects of peripheral devices such as the units 154, 155, 156, 171, 181 and the main display device 131. By making the outline of the ball unit 161 shining or changing the color, it is possible to make a new production and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the light emission color of the protruding portion 3704 may be changed according to, for example, the expectation level of the game.

  In addition, since the protrusion 3704 is provided on the ball unit 161 itself, when the outline of the ball unit 161 is illuminated, it is easy to accurately determine the position to be illuminated. For example, the main display device 131 provided on the back side of the ball unit 161 can be used to produce an effect that the outline of the ball unit 161 is shining. It is necessary to display at a predetermined position (a position corresponding to the outline of the ball unit 161). If this display position is shifted, it is not possible to produce an effect that makes the outline of the ball unit 161 appear shining. When the mounting position of the ball unit 161 on the inner frame 170 is shifted or changed, it is necessary to adjust the display position on the main display device 131 according to the shift or change, and it is necessary to perform a laborious operation. is there. On the other hand, by providing the ball unit 161 itself with the protrusion 3704 to make it shine, the labor-intensive work as described above is unnecessary, and accurate positioning is facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 42A, an inclined portion 4203 is provided inside the protruding portion 3704 of the light guide portion 3702, and the protruding portion 3704 is biased backward by a distance L. Therefore, the position of the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate 3701 can be shifted rearward, the thickness Tt of the ball unit 161 as a whole can be increased by that amount, and the shape thereof can be approximated to a ball shape. Therefore, the ball unit 161 simulating a ball can be made more realistic. That is, since other devices are arranged before and after the ball unit 161, the thickness Tt cannot be simply increased. Since the position of the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate 3701 is moved rearward, the shape of the ball unit 161 can be made more realistic, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.
For reference, a comparative example in which the inclined portion 4203 is not provided is shown in FIG. In this case, the total thickness is Ta. By providing the inclined portion 4203 and shifting the protruding portion 3704 backward as in the present embodiment, the thickness of the ball unit 161 can be increased to Tt by that amount (distance L).

[Description of Drive Mechanism of Ball Unit 161]
44 to 46 show a drive mechanism (hereinafter referred to as a ball unit drive mechanism) 4401 for moving the ball unit 161 up and down. The ball unit drive mechanism 4401 includes a base plate 4402, a drive motor 4501, a first gear 4601, a slider 4509, a second gear 4404, a third gear 4405, a fourth gear 4406, and an auxiliary spring 4407.

The base plate 4402 is fixed at a predetermined position on the inner frame 170. A drive motor 4501, a first gear 4601, a slider 4509, a second gear 4404, a third gear 4405, and a fourth gear 4406 are attached to the base plate 4402.
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the slider 4509 is provided with an input side rack 4502 and an output side rack 4503. The input side rack 4502 is provided with the first gear 4601 and the output side rack 4503 is provided with the second gear 4404. Each biting. Further, the second gear 4404 meshes with the third gear 4405, and the third gear 4405 meshes with the fourth gear 4406, respectively.

  The third gear 4405 and the fourth gear 4406 have the same diameter, and are arranged above the second gear 4404 side by side. The third gear 4405 and the fourth gear 4406 are provided with arms 4504 and 4505, respectively. A left operation shaft 4506 is provided at the tip of the arm 4504 of the third gear 4405, and a right operation shaft 4507 is provided at the tip of the arm 4505 of the fourth gear 4406. The light guide 3702 of the ball unit 161 is provided with a pair of left and right elongated holes 3706 and 3707. The right operating shaft 4507 is inserted into the right elongated hole 3706, and the left operating shaft 4506 is inserted into the left elongated hole 3707. ing.

  44B, 45B, and 46B, when the drive motor 4501 rotates in the forward direction to rotate the first gear 4601 in the direction of the arrow A1, the slider 4509 moves to the arrow in the figure. Slide in the A2 direction to rotate the second gear 4404 in the direction of arrow A3 in the figure. Therefore, the third gear 4405 rotates in the direction of arrow A4 in the figure, and the fourth gear 4406 rotates in the direction of arrow A5 in the figure. Since the third gear 4405 and the fourth gear 4406 have the same diameter, the rotation speed (rotation angle) is also the same, the left and right arms 4504 and 4505 are simultaneously raised by the same amount, and the left and right operation shafts 4506 and 4507 are simultaneously moved. Since it rises by the same amount, the left and right operation shafts 4506 and 4507 slide the right and left elongated holes 3706 and 3707 and raise the light guide portion 3702, that is, the ball unit 161 straight.

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 4501 rotates in the reverse direction and rotates the first gear 4601 in the direction of the arrow B1 in the drawing in the state of FIGS. 44 (A), 45 (A), and 46 (A), the slider 4509 is shown in the drawing. Slide in the direction of arrow B2, and rotate the second gear 4404 in the direction of arrow B3 in the figure. Therefore, the third gear 4405 rotates in the direction of arrow B4 in the figure, and the fourth gear 4406 rotates in the direction of arrow B5 in the figure. Since the third gear 4405 and the fourth gear 4406 have the same diameter, the rotation speed (rotation angle) is also the same, the left and right arms 4504 and 4505 are simultaneously lowered by the same amount, and the left and right operation shafts 4506 and 4507 are simultaneously moved. Since it is lowered by the same amount, the light guide 3702, that is, the ball unit 161 is lowered straight while the left and right operation shafts 4506 and 4507 slide in the left and right elongated holes 3706 and 3707.

  In the present embodiment, in order to rotate the third gear 4405 and the fourth gear 4406 synchronously, the rotation of the second gear 4404 is first transmitted to the third gear 4405, and then the rotation of the third gear 4405 is transmitted to the fourth gear 4406. To tell. That is, the rotation of the second gear 4404 is transmitted to the third gear 4405 and not directly transmitted to the fourth gear 4406. Therefore, the second gear 4404 is disposed closer to the third gear 4405 (see FIG. 46), and the left operating shaft 4506 is closer to the second gear 4404 in the lowered position (position shown in FIG. 46B). End up. Therefore, a recess 4602 is provided in the arm 4504 of the third gear 4405 to avoid interference with the second gear 4404.

  A fifth gear 4508 is engaged with the first gear 4601, and the fifth gear 4161 is raised when the ball unit 161 is raised to the raised position (the positions shown in FIGS. 44A, 45A, and 46A). The rotational position of the gear 4508 and the rotational position of the fifth gear 4508 when the ball unit 161 is lowered to the lowered position (positions shown in FIGS. 44B, 45B, and 46B) are shown. It can be detected by a detection device that does not. When the ball unit 161 is raised from the lowered position, the drive motor 4501 is turned off when the detection device detects that the ball unit 161 has been raised to the raised position. When the ball unit 161 is lowered from the raised position, the drive motor 4501 is turned off when the detection device detects that the ball unit 161 is lowered to the lowered position.

As shown in FIG. 44A, an auxiliary spring 4407 is provided between the base plate 4402 and the ball unit 161 to apply a force in the direction in which the ball unit 161 is raised. Therefore, a smaller motor can be used as the drive motor 4501.
The strength of the auxiliary spring 4407 is set slightly weaker than the strength corresponding to the weight of the ball unit 161.
In the present embodiment, in addition to the second gear 4404, the third gear 4405, the fourth gear 4406, etc., the base plate 4402 is also made of resin and has a small thickness. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the weight can be reduced. These parts are provided with ribs for increasing the strength, and the rigidity necessary for the parts is ensured.

[Description of the positional relationship between the ball unit 161, the light guide unit 1501 of the light guide unit 181 and the main display device 131]
FIG. 47 shows the positional relationship between the ball unit 161, the light guide unit 1501 of the light guide unit 181, and the main display device 131. FIG. 47 shows the gaming machine 100 as viewed from the right side.
The ball unit 161 is provided on the back side (position in the + Z direction) of the light guide unit 1501, and the player can see the ball unit 161 in the back through the light guide unit 1501. Therefore, an effect using the light guide unit 181 and the ball unit 161 can be performed. For example, the light guide unit 1501 of the light guide unit 181 and the protrusion 3704 of the light guide unit 3702 of the ball unit 161 may emit light at the same time, or may emit light at different timings. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the projection 3704 of the light guide 3702 of the ball unit 161 emits light, and the light rays that radiate radially are displayed at predetermined positions of the light guide 1501 of the light guide 181 From the person, the outline of the ball unit 161 shines, and a display effect can be performed as if light is emitted around it. In this way, an unprecedented new production becomes possible and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

The main display device 131 is provided on the back side of the ball unit 161, and the player can see the main display device 131 in the back of the ball unit 161. Therefore, an effect using the ball unit 161 and the main display device 131 can be performed. For example, the protruding portion 3704 of the light guide portion 3702 of the ball unit 161 and the main display device 131 may emit light / display simultaneously, or may emit light / display at different timings. Further, for example, the protrusion 3704 of the light guide 3702 of the ball unit 161 is caused to emit light, and a flame image is displayed at a predetermined position of the main display device 131. It is possible to produce a display as if the flame spreads. In this way, an unprecedented new production becomes possible and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.
In addition, since the effect can be changed by changing the video displayed on the main display device 131, the effect can be easily changed. In addition, since the effect can be corrected by correcting the video displayed on the main display device 131, the effect can be easily corrected.

  Furthermore, since an effect using the light guide unit 181, the ball unit 161, and the main display device 131 can be performed, an unprecedented new effect is possible, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

[Description of holding mechanism]
The movable combination (gimmick) of this embodiment, specifically, the big gun unit 154, the first gun unit 155, the second gun unit 156, and the ball unit 161 are provided with a holding mechanism.
[Description of holding mechanism of big gun unit 154]
The big gun unit 154 includes a holding mechanism.
FIG. 49A shows a main part of the holding mechanism of the big gun unit 154. The holding mechanism holds the big gun unit 154 that is always urged (pulled up) toward the standby position (up position) by the return spring 3301 at the visible position (down position). A driving long hole 2608 of the movable unit 2602 and a driving shaft 2609 of the third gear 2714 are provided.
As shown in FIG. 49A, a curved portion 4901 slightly curved downward is provided at the end of the driving slot 2608, and the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 of the big gun unit 154 are provided. In the state in which is lowered to the visually recognizable position, the drive shaft 2609 reaches the bending portion 4901.

  Since the spring force of the return spring 3301 (arrow Fs in FIG. 49A) always works in the direction of raising the first movable unit 2602, in this state, the drive shaft 2609 is moved to the back of the curved portion 4901. Force (arrow Fd in FIG. 49A) works, and the drive shaft 2609 does not come off the curved portion 4901 even when the drive motor 2605 is turned off. In order to move (raise) the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603, the drive shaft 2609 needs to be moved away from the curved portion 4901 and moved in the drive long hole 2608. Therefore, the first movable unit 2602 and The second movable unit 2603 cannot move and is held at a visually recognizable position.

That is, when the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 move from the standby position to the visible position, the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are held at the visible position by the spring force of the return spring 3301. . Therefore, the drive motor 2605 can be turned off.
Note that the drive shaft 2609 can be detached from the curved portion 4901 as it is by rotating the drive motor 2605 in the reverse direction. Therefore, when the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are raised from the visually recognizable position, the drive motor 2605 may be reversed as it is.

In a state where the first movable unit 2602 and the second movable unit 2603 are moved to the visually recognizable position, the power of the drive motor 2605 can be turned off, so that the load on the drive motor 2605 can be reduced. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the big gun unit 154 can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, when holding the 1st movable unit 2602 and the 2nd movable unit 2603 in a visually recognizable position, you may make it lock in the said visually recognizable position by providing the locking mechanism which is not shown in figure.

[Description of holding mechanism of first gun unit 155 and second gun unit 156]
The first gun unit 155 and the second gun unit 156 are each provided with a holding mechanism.
FIG. 49B shows a main part of the holding mechanism of the first gun unit 155 and the holding mechanism of the second gun unit 156.

[Holding mechanism of first gun unit 155]
The holding mechanism of the first gun unit 155 holds the unit main body 3502 in the protruding position by the weight of the unit main body 3502. The second guide long hole 3506 of the base portion 3501, the slide shaft portion 3505 of the unit main body 3502, and the like. It is configured with. As shown on the left side of FIG. 49B, a curved portion 4902 that is slightly curved downward is provided at the end of the second guide elongated hole 3506 so that the unit main body 3502 of the first gun unit 155 is in the protruding position. In the state of being rotated up to, the slide shaft portion 3505 reaches the bending portion 4902.
In this state, due to the weight of the unit main body 3502, a force (arrow Fg in FIG. 49B) toward the back of the curved portion 4902 is applied to the slide shaft portion 3505, and the slide shaft can be turned off even if the drive motor is turned off. The portion 3505 does not come off the curved portion 4902. In order for the unit main body 3502 to move (return to the standby position), it is necessary to remove the slide shaft portion 3505 from the curved portion 4902 and move the second guide long hole 3506, so the unit main body 3502 cannot move, It is held in the protruding position.

That is, when the unit main body 3502 moves from the standby position to the protruding position, the unit main body 3502 is held at the protruding position by the weight of the unit main body 3502. Therefore, the power source of the drive motor can be turned off.
When returning the unit main body 3502 from the protruding position to the standby position, the slide shaft portion 3505 can be removed from the bending portion 4901 as it is by rotating the drive motor, so that the unit main body 3502 can be returned to the standby position. it can.

In the state where the unit main body 3502 is moved to the protruding position, the power of the drive motor can be turned off, so that the load on the drive motor can be reduced. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the 1st gun unit 155 improves, and the interest of a game can be improved.
When the unit main body 3502 is held at the protruding position, a lock mechanism (not shown) may be provided to lock the unit main body 3502 at the protruding position.

[Holding mechanism of second gun unit 156]
The holding mechanism of the second gun unit 156 holds the unit main body 3601 in the protruding position by the weight of the unit main body 3601 (FIG. 36B), and guides the base portion 3602 (see FIG. 36B). A long hole 3603 and a slide shaft portion 3604 of the unit main body 3601 are provided. As shown on the right side of FIG. 49B, a curved portion 4903 that is slightly curved downward is provided at the end of the guide elongated hole 3603 so that the unit main body 3601 of the second gun unit 156 can be rotated to the protruding position. In the moving state, the slide shaft portion 3604 reaches the bending portion 4903.
In this state, due to the weight of the unit body 3601, a force (arrow Fg in FIG. 49B) toward the back of the bending portion 4903 acts on the slide shaft portion 3604, and the slide is performed even when the drive motor is turned off. The shaft portion 3604 does not come off the curved portion 4903. In order to move the unit main body 3601 (return to the standby position), it is necessary to remove the slide shaft portion 3604 from the curved portion 4903 and move it in the guide long hole 3603. Therefore, the unit main body 3601 cannot move, and the protruding position Retained.

That is, when the unit main body 3601 moves from the standby position to the protruding position, the unit main body 3601 is held at the protruding position by the weight of the unit main body 3601. Therefore, the power source of the drive motor can be turned off.
Note that when the unit main body 3601 is returned from the protruding position to the standby position, the slide shaft portion 3604 can be removed from the curved portion 4903 as it is by rotating the drive motor, so that the unit main body 3601 can be returned to the standby position. it can.

In a state where the unit main body 3601 is moved to the protruding position, the power of the drive motor can be turned off, so that the load on the drive motor can be reduced. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the 2nd gun unit 156 improves, and the interest of a game can be improved.
When the unit main body 3601 is held at the protruding position, a lock mechanism (not shown) may be provided to lock the unit main body 3601 at the protruding position.

[Description of the holding mechanism of the ball unit 161]
The ball unit 161 includes a holding mechanism.
FIG. 49C shows a main part of the holding mechanism of the ball unit 161. Since the strength of the auxiliary spring 4407 is slightly weaker than the weight of the ball unit 161, the holding mechanism holds the ball unit 161 in which a downward force is always exerted by its own weight in its raised position. The light guide 3702 includes a pair of left and right elongated holes 3706 and 3707, a left operation shaft 4506 of the third gear 4405, and a right operation shaft 4507 of the fourth gear 4406.

As shown in FIG. 49C, the inner ends of the pair of left and right elongated holes 3706 and 3707 are bent downward to be provided with peak portions 4904 and 4905. In a state where the ball unit 161 has moved to the raised position, the operation shaft portions 4506 and 4507 are positioned at the peak portions 4904 and 4905, respectively.
Further, since the strength of the auxiliary spring 4407 is slightly weaker than the strength corresponding to the weight of the ball unit 161, in this state, the ball unit 161 has a downward force due to the weight (arrow Fg in FIG. 49C). ) Is working. Therefore, a force (arrow Fd in FIG. 49C) directed to the top of each peak portion 4904 and 4905 is applied to each operation shaft portion 4506 and 4507, and each operation shaft even when the drive motor 4501 is turned off. The parts 4506 and 4507 do not deviate from the peak parts 4904 and 4905. In order to lower the ball unit 161, it is necessary to remove the operation shaft portions 4506 and 4507 from the peak portions 4904 and 4905 and move them in the long holes 3706 and 3707. Therefore, the ball unit 161 can be lowered. Rather, it is held in the raised position.

That is, when the ball unit 161 moves from the lowered position to the raised position, the ball unit 161 is held at the raised position by the weight of the ball unit 161. Therefore, the power source of the drive motor 4501 can be turned off.
When the ball unit 161 is lowered from the raised position, the operation shaft portions 4506 and 4507 can be detached from the mountain portions 4904 and 4905 as they are by reversing the drive motor 4501, so the ball unit 161 is lowered. Can be made.

In a state where the ball unit 161 is moved to the raised position, the power of the drive motor 4501 can be turned off, so that the load on the drive motor 4501 can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the ball unit 161 is improved, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.
When the ball unit 161 is held at the raised position, a lock mechanism (not shown) may be provided to lock the ball unit 161 at the raised position.

  Next, with respect to the display 125 of the gaming machine 100 described above, embodiments having different configurations as the embodiment A, the embodiment B, and the embodiment C will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Embodiment A>
[Outline of Display 5008 and Sub Display 2420]
FIG. 50 is an example of a front view of the display device 5008. In the present embodiment, the display device 5008 is disposed adjacent to the outer rail 5910a at the lower left of the game area 106, but is not limited to this, and can be disposed at various positions.

  The display 5008 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to profits given to a player in a game). More specifically, the display 5008 includes the first and second special symbol displays 5000 and 5010, the first and second special symbol hold displays 5001 and 5011, the probability variation display 5020, the time reduction display 5021, and the right-handed display. 5022, jackpot round number display 5030, normal symbol display 5040, and normal symbol hold display 5041 can be configured. Details of these indicators will be described later.

  The sub-display 2420 also displays information relating to the benefits given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol displays and the first and second special symbol hold displays. It can be configured as a display unit, a probability change display, a time reduction display, a right-handed display, a jackpot round number display, a normal symbol display, and a normal symbol hold display.

  If both the display device 5008 and the sub-display device 2420 are mounted, each of the functions as the display devices 5000 to 5041 described above is assigned to either the display device 5008 or the sub-display device 2420. If one of the display 5008 or the sub-display 2420 is mounted, the mounted display 5008 or the sub-display 2420 has all the functions as the above-described displays 5000 to 5041. .

[Details of Display 5008]
As shown in FIG. 50, the display device 5008 has a plurality of LEDs 5045 arranged in two rows. When displaying information related to the profits given to the player in the game only by the display 5008, these LEDs 5045 are provided with the first and second special symbol displays 5000 and 5010 and the first and second special symbol hold. The display units 5001 and 5011, the probability change display unit 5020, the time reduction display unit 5021, the right-handed display unit 5022, the jackpot round number display unit 5030, the normal symbol display unit 5040, and the normal symbol hold display unit 5041 are configured. The LEDs 5045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch path of the game balls formed by the rails 5910a and 5910b (see FIG. 124). Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 5045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 5045 may be arranged in one row along the launch path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. They may be arranged regardless of the passage.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the display 5008 includes a display substrate 5200 on which a plurality of LEDs 5045 are surface-mounted, a cover member 5202 that covers at least the front side of the display substrate 5200, and a display substrate 5200. And a protective member 5204 disposed on the side. The display 5008 is installed in a standing posture so that the display substrate 5200 disposed between the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 is along the board surface of the game board 102A. The display device 5008 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside to the display substrate 5200 by the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204. The display 5008 is attached to the plate member 2400 by fitting into an attachment opening (not shown) formed in the plate member 2400 constituting the game board 102A. The light from the LED 5045 is visible. Further, the display 5008 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 102A (plate member 2400), and an access from a back side of the game board 102A to a connector 5100 (FIG. 51), which will be described later, provided to face the back side. It is possible.

  The display 5008 is attached to the game board 102A by fixing the cover member 5202 or the protective member 5204 constituting the outer shell of the display 5008 by screwing, bonding, or other methods. Here, the display 5008 has a configuration in which it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace on either the display 5008 or the game board 102A with respect to the game board 102A due to adhesion or the like. It may be attached. In other words, the structure for attaching the display 5008 and the game board 102A is a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 102A or the display 5008, and the game board 102A or the display 5008 is destroyed or deformed by the removal. Thus, at least one of the configurations that cannot be assembled as in the original, and the game board 102A or the display device 5008 is destroyed or deformed by the removal, so that the game board 102A or the display device 5008 leaves a trace of removal. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the display substrate 5200 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs 5045 are provided on the front surface that faces the player, and light can be emitted from each LED 5045 toward the front side. . The LED 5045 is mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5200 instead of through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 5045 to the hole of the printed circuit board. In the display substrate 5200, the light emitting element of the LED 5045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the display substrate 5200 are on the same front surface of the display substrate 5200. That is, in the display substrate 5200, the lead for connecting the LED 5045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED 5045 is not disposed on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 5045 are arranged in two upper and lower rows in the upper region of the display substrate 5200. As the LED 5045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED 5045, any of a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage that the space can be reduced. Under the control of a control means such as a main control board 300 (FIG. 3) or an effect control board 320 (FIG. 3) to be described later, the display substrate 5200 is controlled to be in a state of lighting, extinction, blinking, and the like of the plurality of LEDs 5045. Information related to profits given to the player is displayed according to the state of lighting, extinguishing, flashing, etc., and combinations and state changes thereof.

  Thus, by mounting the LED 5045 on the display substrate 5200, the space for disposing the LEDs 5045 on the display substrate 5200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 5200 can be made more compact. Further, by mounting the LED 5045 on the display substrate 5200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 5045 on the front surface of the display substrate 5200, the mounting of the LED 5045 does not affect the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 like through-hole mounting. Therefore, the display substrate 5200 can arrange other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 5045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 can be used effectively. The display substrate 5200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 5045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the display substrate 5200 (FIG. 52: this embodiment) or a configuration in which the LED 5045 is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the display substrate 5200. Also good. The display substrate 5200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in a front region where a plurality of LEDs 5045 are mounted, or an absorbing portion that hardly reflects light such as black in the front region. May be provided. In the case where the light emitting element of the LED 5045 protrudes from the surface of the display substrate 5200, the light irradiated from the LED 5045 is reflected by the reflecting part and can be efficiently used by providing the reflecting part around the light emitting element. In addition, in the case where the light emitting element of the LED 5045 is embedded in the display substrate 5200, by providing an absorption portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 5045 by the absorption portion is prevented from diffusing on the front surface of the display substrate 5200. can do.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the display substrate 5200 as viewed from the front side when displaying information related to the benefits given to the player in the game only by the display device 5008. The first special symbol indicator 5000 is composed of six LEDs 5045 on the right side of the upper row, and the second special symbol indicator 5010 is composed of six LEDs 5045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold indicator 5001 is composed of two LEDs 5045 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 5000 and the second special symbol indicator 5010, and the second special symbol hold indicator 5011 is It consists of two LEDs 5045 on the right side of the second special symbol display 5010. On the right side of the second special symbol holding display 5011, the probability variation display 5020, the time-shortening display 5021, and the right-handed display 5022 are arranged one by one in this order. The big hit round number indicator 5030 is composed of eight LEDs 5045 on the left side of the lower row, the normal symbol indicator 5040 is constituted by three LEDs 5045 on the right side of the big hit round number indicator 5030, and the normal symbol hold indicator 5041 is , Composed of two LEDs 5045 from the right side of the lower row. Note that the configuration of the display devices 5000, 5001, 5010, 5011, 5020, 5021, 5022, 5030, 5040, and 5041 using a plurality of LEDs 5045 is not limited to this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the display substrate 5200 is provided with a connector 5100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 5045 is mounted, and a display is provided via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 5100. The device 5008 (LED 5045) and the main control board 300 are electrically connected. The connector 5100 is a so-called jack in which a plug provided at the end of the harness is detachable, and may be either a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 5100 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the connector 5100 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board. Further, in the connector 5100, a connector opening into which a plug provided at an end of the harness is inserted opens in either the rear (this embodiment) or in the vertical and horizontal directions. Thus, the main body of the connector 5100 and the solder for fixing the connector 5100 to the display substrate 5200 are on the same rear surface of the display substrate 5200. That is, the display substrate 5200 does not protrude from the front surface of the lead for connecting the connector 5100 to the circuit, and the solder for fixing the connector 5100 is not disposed on the front surface. In this manner, by mounting the connector 5100 on the display substrate 5200, the arrangement space of the connector 5100 on the display substrate 5200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 5200 can be made more compact.

  The connector 5100 is disposed on the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 5045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 5045 and the connector 5100 overlap with the display substrate 5200 sandwiched between the front and back sides. As described above, by mounting the connector 5100 on the rear surface of the display substrate 5200, the mounting of the connector 5100 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 5200 like through-hole mounting. Accordingly, the display substrate 5200 can be provided with the connector 5100 on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 5045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front and rear surfaces of the display substrate 5200 can be used effectively. The substrate 5200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a resistor 5600 as current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the display substrate 5200. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 5600 are arranged side by side at positions that do not overlap the connector 5100. . In addition, the resistor 5600 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 5600 is fixed to the hole of the printed board, but in this embodiment, is mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5200. In the display substrate 5200, the resistor 5600 and the solder for fixing the resistor 5600 to the display substrate 5200 are on the same rear surface of the display substrate 5200. That is, the display substrate 5200 has no lead protruding from the front surface thereof for connecting the resistor 5600 to the circuit, and no solder for fixing the resistor 5600 is disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 5600 are arranged in the upper region of the display substrate 5200. As shown in FIG. 58, the resistor 5600 is disposed between the connector 5100 and the plurality of LEDs 5045 in the circuit of the display substrate 5200, and restricts the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 5045 to be a predetermined value or less. , An excessive current is prevented from flowing through each LED 5045.

  In this manner, by mounting the resistor 5600 on the display substrate 5200, even if the resistor 5045 breaks down, it can be dealt with by replacing the display device 5008, and the maintenance becomes easy. Since the display device 5008 can be easily replaced, it is possible to shorten the game pause period and avoid impairing the fun of the game. Further, by mounting the resistor 5600 on the display substrate 5200, the space for disposing the resistor 5600 on the display substrate 5200 can be reduced, and the display substrate 5200 can be made more compact.

  The resistor 5600 may be disposed on the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 5045 mounted on the front surface of the display substrate 5200. In this case, the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 5045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 5600 may have either a configuration in which all overlap or a part in which the display substrate 5200 is sandwiched in front and back. In this way, by mounting the resistor 5600 on the rear surface of the display substrate 5200, the mounting of the resistor 5600 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 5200 like through-hole mounting. Accordingly, in the display substrate 5200, the resistor 5600 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting region where the plurality of LEDs 5045 are mounted on the front surface. The substrate 5200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 5045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 5600 may not be overlapped with the display substrate 5200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the cover member 5202 has a front cover portion 5208 in which windows 5206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 5045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5200 are formed, and a peripheral edge of the front cover portion 5208. And a horizontal cover portion 5210 formed so as to rise to the rear side. The cover member 5202 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 5208 and the lateral cover portion 5210, and the display substrate 5200 is accommodated in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 5208 and the lateral cover portion 5210. It is possible. When the display substrate 5200 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 5202, the display substrate 5200 is positioned closer to the front cover portion 5208 (front side) than the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 5210. The entire display substrate 5200 is accommodated in the inner region of the cover member 5202. In other words, the cover member 5202 covers the front surface of the display substrate 5200 on which the LEDs 5045 are mounted with the front cover portion 5208, covers the peripheral surface of the display substrate 5200 with the horizontal cover portion 5210, and displays due to the presence of the cover member 5202. It is difficult to access the front surface and peripheral surface of the substrate 5200 from the outside. The cover member 5202 of the present embodiment has an inner region formed in accordance with a part of the outer edge of the display substrate 5200, and when the display substrate 5200 is stored in the inner region, the display substrate 5200 is formed on the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 5210. The display substrate 5200 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  In this manner, since the display substrate 5200 is disposed in the state of being accommodated in the cover member 5202, it is difficult to access the display substrate 5200 from the front side or the lateral side, and illegal acts on the display substrate 5200 are prevented. can do. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the display substrate 5200, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 5200 from the cover member 5202 because it is difficult to access the display substrate 5200 as described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 57, the cover member 5202 has a window 5206 penetrating the front cover portion 5208 back and forth corresponding to the LED 5045 by a window defining portion 5212 formed in the front cover portion 5208. Has been. The window 5206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 5045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to a predetermined number of two or more LEDs 5045 among the plurality of LEDs 5045. The window 5206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle (this embodiment) or a circular shape, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 5045 so that one or more corresponding LEDs 5045 are entirely inside. Yes. In the cover member 5202, the windows 5206 are formed in two rows. When the cover member 5202 is disposed in a state where the front side of the display substrate 5200 is covered, the windows 5206 are disposed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 5045. Thus, the lighting state of each LED 5045 facing each window 5206 can be visually recognized through the window 5206.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 57, the cover member 5202 penetrates the front cover portion 5208 back and forth, and defines a window 5206 formed corresponding to the LED 5045. The state of the LED 5045 corresponding to the window 5206 is changed to the window 5206. A window defining unit 5212 configured to be distinguishable from one another is provided. The window defining portion 5212 is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting rearward from the front cover portion 5208 (this embodiment), and a portion corresponding to the front side of the mounting region of the LED 5045 in the front cover portion 5208 is thickly formed. It is provided depending on the configuration. When the window defining part 5212 is formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining parts 5212 may be separated from each other and independent, or a part of the adjacent window defining parts 5212 may be integrated. . Between the front opening of the window 5206 facing the front side and the rear opening of the window 5206 facing the corresponding LED 5045, the window partition part 5212 has a certain length longer than the plate thickness of the horizontal cover part 5210 or the display substrate 5200, for example. Is provided, and the window partitioning part 5212 functions as a light guiding part for guiding the light emitted from the LED 5045 to prevent the light from diffusing. In other words, the window 5206 may be configured such that a gap is formed between the front cover portion 5208 and the front surface of the display substrate 5200, or a portion corresponding to the LED 5045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 5208 is projected to the front side. By the window defining part 5212 that defines the light, the light of the LED 5045 can be guided to the front side without any leakage.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the cover member 5202 is combined with the display substrate 5200 so that the window defining portion 5212 faces the front surface of the display substrate 5200, and all the LEDs 5045 mounted on the front surface of the display substrate 5200 are mounted. The perimeter is individually enclosed by the window defining unit 5212. In this embodiment, the rear end of the window defining part 5212 formed in a cylindrical shape is in contact with the front surface of the display substrate 5200, and the adjacent LED 5045 is partitioned by the window defining part 5212. Note that the cover member 5202 and the display substrate 5200 are formed so that the window defining portion 5212 of the cover member 5202 and the front surface of the display substrate 5200 are in contact with each other, and the rear surface of the front cover portion 5208 and the surface of the display substrate 5200 are It is basically configured so that there is a gap between them. As described above, the LED 5045 corresponding to the window 5206 is surrounded by the window defining unit 5212 that defines the window 5206, so that the light emitted from the LED 5045 does not diffuse and the state of the LED 5045 is transmitted through the window 5206. Can be more easily identified. Further, since the rear end of the window defining portion 5212 is in contact with the front surface of the display substrate 5200 and blocks the gap between the front cover portion 5208 and the display substrate 5200, light leaks from the gap to the next window 5206. This can be prevented, and the state of the LED 5045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if an unauthorized tool is intruded through the window 5206, the window creating unit 5212 can block the unauthorized tool only in the window 5206, and can more appropriately prevent an illegal act. Note that the window defining unit 5212 may face the rear end (rear surface) and the front surface of the display substrate 5200 so as to have a slight gap.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the cover member 5202 includes a protruding alignment portion 5700 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 5208. The alignment portion 5700 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 5212 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 5212 facing the front surface of the display substrate 5200. The alignment unit 5700 is configured to fit into a substrate hole 5500 (FIG. 55) formed in the display substrate 5200 so that the display substrate 5200 can be aligned with the cover member 5202. In the cover member 5202, a plurality of alignment portions 5700 are distributed and arranged separately from each other on the rear surface of the front cover portion 5208. Among the plurality of alignment portions 5700, there may be one formed separately from the window defining portion 5212. Each alignment portion 5700 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 5700 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 5212, but the rear end thereof is positioned in front of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 5210 and is accommodated inside the cover member 5202.

  The display substrate 5200 includes a substrate hole 5500 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 5500 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 5700. The substrate hole 5500 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 5700. The alignment portion 5700 and the substrate hole 5500 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 5700 is fitted into the substrate hole 5500, and the display substrate 5200 is relatively positioned in the inner region of the cover member 5202. Is defined. Therefore, the cover member 5202 and the display substrate 5200 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally with each other by fitting the alignment portion 5700 and the substrate hole 5500.

  As described above, the cover member 5202 and the display substrate 5200 are assembled in a state of being positioned with respect to each other by fitting the alignment portion 5700 and the substrate hole 5500. Therefore, the LED 5045 and the window 5206 corresponding thereto are arranged. Alignment can be performed without deviation, and the state of the LED 5045 can be identified more suitably. Further, since the alignment unit 5700 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 5212 and is reinforced by the window defining unit 5212, the alignment unit 5700 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining unit 5212. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 5700 integrally with the window defining portion 5212, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and damage or deformation of the alignment portion 5700 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the display substrate 5200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 5500 formed so as to sandwich the connector 5100 therebetween. The cover member 5202 is provided with an alignment portion 5700 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 5500, with the connector 5100 mounted on the display substrate 5200 interposed therebetween. More specifically, the display substrate 5200 has a pair of substrate holes 5500 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 5100 sandwiched in the left and right (this embodiment), up and down, or diagonal directions. The cover member 5202 is provided with a pair of alignment portions 5700 corresponding to each of the substrate holes 5500 formed. As described above, the display 5008 has the alignment structure including the alignment portion 5700 and the board hole 5500 into which the alignment portion 5700 is fitted, not unevenly distributed only in one area of the connector 5100 but in both areas sandwiching the connector 5100. They are distributed.

  In the display device 5008, an alignment structure of the cover member 5202 and the display substrate 5200 by the alignment portion 5700 and the substrate hole 5500 into which the alignment portion 5700 is fitted is distributed in the regions on both sides of the connector 5100. The connector 5100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached. However, the display substrate 5200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 5100 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the protection member 5204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 5400 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 5100 protruding from the rear surface of the display substrate 5200. The connector opening 5400 is formed according to the outer shape of the connector 5100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 5400 and the connector 5100 passed through the connector opening 5400. The protection member 5204 covers at least a part of the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 housed in the cover member 5202 so that it is difficult to access the rear surface of the display substrate 5200 from the outside. Alternatively, the display substrate 5200 is attached. The protective member 5204 is disposed so as to fit inside the cover member 5202, and is disposed on the rear side of the display substrate 5200 housed inside the cover member 5202. The protection member 5204 of this embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the cover member 5202 defined by the lateral cover portion 5210. When the protective member 5204 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 5202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 5204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 5210, and the protective material 5204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. When the protective member 5204 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 5202, the position where the rear surface of the protective member 5204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 5210 or the front cover portion 5208 side of the open end. Arranged on the (front side), the entire protection member 5204 is accommodated in the inner region of the cover member 5202.

  As described above, since the rear side of the display substrate 5200 is covered with the protective member 5204, it is difficult to access the display substrate 5200 from the rear, and an illegal act on the display substrate 5200 can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 5204 makes it difficult to remove the display substrate 5200 from the cover member 5202. Here, since the protection member 5204 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 5202, it is difficult to remove the protection member 5204 itself by being obstructed by the cover member 5202.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the cover member 5202 and the protective member 5204 are assembled in a concave and convex fitting structure. After the assembly, the cover member 5202 and the protective member 5205 are protected when it is difficult to remove, reassemble or disassemble each other. Any one of the members 5204 is configured to leave a trace of removal. The fitting structure is such that a claw-like engagement portion 5214 provided on one of the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 (the protection member 5204 in this embodiment) is connected to the other of the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 are integrated by being engaged with the engagement receiving portion 5216 provided on the cover member 5202) and being caught by the engagement portion 5214 and the engagement receiving portion 5216. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204, and the cover structure 5202 and the protection member 5204 are distributed on the sides facing each other with the display substrate 5200 interposed therebetween. .

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the cover member 5202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 5216 in the lateral cover portion 5210. The engagement receiving portion 5216 is provided on the open end side of the horizontal cover portion 5210 so as to form an opening edge on the rear side in the engagement opening formed so as to penetrate the horizontal cover portion 5210. The lateral cover portion 5210 is formed in a concave shape having a front portion that opens outward from the engagement opening to have a thin plate thickness, and an engagement receiving portion 5216 is provided over the opening side of the recess. In other words, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 5216 is provided with a plate thickness that is thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 5210 so that the inside is recessed, and the engagement portion 5214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the protection member 5204 is provided with an engaging portion 5214 that protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protection member 5204. The width of the engagement portion 5214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 5216 (engagement opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 5214 and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engagement portion 5214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 5216, the engagement portion 5214 hits the opening edge of the engagement opening and is positioned. The engaging portion 5214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that inclines backward as the front surface approaches the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 5204. In other words, the engaging portion 5214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects with the engagement receiving portion 5214, and the rear surface intersects with the engagement receiving portion 5216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is extended. As a result, when the engaging portion 5214 is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 5216, the cover member 5202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 5214 that contacts the engaging receiving portion 5216, and the engaging receiving portion The engagement portion 5214 can be easily fitted into the engagement opening over the 5216. Then, when the engaging portion 5214 is fitted into the engaging opening, the engaging portion 5214 is caught by the engaging receiving portion 5216 and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 5214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 5214 and the engaging receiving portion 5216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 5214 and the engaging receiving portion 5216 are hooked to face each other, so that the engaging portion 5214 is engaged. The cover member 5202 is not guided so as to be spread by the engaging portion 5214 as in the case where the engagement receiving portion 5214 is fitted. Therefore, the protection member 5204 cannot be substantially detached from the cover member 5202 by fitting the engagement portion 5214 into the engagement receiving portion 5216.

  Thus, according to the fitting structure of the engagement portion 5214 and the engagement receiving portion 5216, it is difficult to remove the protection member 5204 from the cover member 5202, and the display substrate 5200 is protected by the protection member 5204. Unauthorized acts on the display substrate 5200 can be prevented. In addition, when the engaging portion 5214 or the engagement receiving portion 5216 is destroyed and the protective member 5204 is forcibly removed from the cover member 5202, a trace of the destruction of the engaging receiving portion 5216 remains on the cover member 5202, and the protective member A trace of destroying the engaging portion 5214 remains in 5204, so that it is easy to find out that there has been an illegal act. Furthermore, when the protective member 5204 is forcibly removed from the cover member 5202, at least one of the engaging portion 5214 or the engaging receiving portion 5216 is broken, and the protective member 5204 cannot be attached to the cover member 5202 again. It becomes difficult to reassemble.

  The display device 5008 of this embodiment is configured such that the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 are difficult to remove, reassemble, and leave a trace of removal. Accordingly, the display substrate 5200 placed between the cover member 5202 and the protection member 5204 is substantially difficult to remove from the cover member 5202, difficult to reassemble with respect to the cover member 5202, and to the cover member 5202. A trace of removal remains. With such a configuration, fraudulent acts on the display substrate 5200 can be prevented, and even if there are fraudulent acts, they can be easily detected.

  As shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, on the front side of the cover member 5202, an identification unit 5220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 5045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 5045 is arranged. The identification means 5220 is provided on the front side of the window 5206, and is provided around the transmission part 5222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and around the transmission part 5222. Is also provided with a shielding portion 5224 as a second region that hardly transmits light. Moreover, the identification means 5220 may be provided with the combination area | region 5226 (FIG. 50) which is displayed on the shielding part 5224 and shows the light emission aspect of two or more LED5045 as a combination. The identification means 5220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the cover member 5202. The identification means 5220 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface area of the cover member 5202 where the window 5206 opens. In this embodiment, the identification means 5220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the cover member 5202. In this embodiment, the identification unit 5220 and the cover member 5202 are bonded, but the size of the identification unit 5220 and the method of attaching to the cover member 5202 are not limited thereto.

  The transmission part 5222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 5206 of the cover member 5202, and the light emitted from the LED 5045 corresponding to the window 5206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. ing. The transmissive part 5222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 5206, and the transmissive part 5222 on the front side of the window 5206 prevents the LED 5045 arranged on the window 5206 opening and the window 5206 from being directly visible from the front side. It is. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, a mode in which the LED 5045 is difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, a mode in which light emitted from the LED 5045 is colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 5045 is diffused to show a large size, a mode in which the light is focused and the light emitted from the LED 5045 is shown in a small size, a mode in which these are combined, etc. Light is diffused by the transmission part 5222. The transmission part 5222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the cover member 5202, and a plurality of transmission parts 5222 are provided in the identification unit 5220 in an arrangement according to the plurality of windows 5206 provided in the cover member 5202. ing. That is, the identification means 5220 is formed with a transmission part 5222 having a quadrangular shape matching the window 5206 and the same size as the window 5206, and the transmission part 5222 closes the front opening of the window 5206.

  As described above, since the front side of the window 5206 is blocked by the transmission portion 5222, it is possible to make it difficult to access the LED 5045 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 5200 from the front side of the display device 5008. That is, the transmissive portion 5222 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the display substrate 5200 through the window 5206 that penetrates to the inside of the cover member 5202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 5045 can be adjusted by the transmission portion 5222, the state of the LED 5045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 5045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 5222, a shielding portion 5224 is provided that is configured so that light is less likely to pass than the transmissive portion 5222 that covers the window 5206. In other words, the shielding portion 5224 is disposed so as to surround the window 5206 on the front side of the cover member 5202. The shielding part 5224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 5222, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 5222 is configured in one sheet constituting the identification means 5220. The shielding part 5224 is arranged so as to overlap the area other than the window 5206 on the front surface of the front cover part 5208 of the cover member 5202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 5206. The shielding unit 5224 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black or a cold color such as amber or the like, and has a low brightness level (which absorbs light well). Is different.

  Thus, since the shielding part 5224 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 5222, the transmissive part 5222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 5045 recognized through the transmissive part 5222 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 5206 and the transmission portion 5222 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 5206 is not visible because it is not directly visible. In addition, if the transmission part 5222 is applied to the window 5206, the transmission part 5222 surrounded by the shielding part 5224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 5045 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 5224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 5222 is set to the same sheet. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5224 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5224 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the combination area 5226 is partitioned by a partition mark 5228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the shielding part 5224. The division mark 5228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmission parts 5222, and the combination area 5226 surrounded by the division mark 5228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, first and second special symbol indicators 5000 and 5010, first and second special symbol hold indicators 5001 and 5011, probability variation indicator 5020, hourly indicator 5021, right-handed indicator 5022, jackpot round number indicator 5030, normal symbol display device 5040, and normal symbol hold display device 5041, of which a plurality of LEDs 5045 (transmission portion 5222) constitute a display device, a group of transmission portions 5222 corresponding to the display device is provided. A combination area 5226 corresponding to each display is formed by being surrounded by a division mark 5228. Note that the section marker 5228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may be any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other regions, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination region 5226. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, specifically, the transmission area 5222 corresponding to the six LEDs 5045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 5228, and the combination area 5226 corresponding to the first special symbol display device 5000 is displayed. The transmission part 5222 corresponding to the six LEDs 5045 in the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 5228, and the combination area 5226 corresponding to the second special symbol display 5010 is displayed. The transmission part 5222 corresponding to the two LEDs 5045 arranged between the first special symbol display 5000 and the second special symbol display 5010 is surrounded by a division mark 5228 and corresponds to the first special symbol hold display 5001. The combination area 5226 to be displayed is displayed. A transmissive part 5222 corresponding to the two LEDs 5045 on the right side of the second special symbol display 5010 is surrounded by a section mark 5228, and a combination area 5226 corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator 5011 is displayed. In addition, the transmission area 5222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 5045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the division mark 5228, and the combination area 5226 corresponding to the big hit round number display 5030 is displayed. A transmissive portion 5222 corresponding to the three LEDs 5045 on the right side of the big hit round number display 5030 is surrounded by a division mark 5228, and a combination area 5226 corresponding to the normal symbol display 5040 is displayed. A transmissive part 5222 corresponding to the two LEDs 5045 from the right side of the lower row is surrounded by a section marker 5228, and a combination area 5226 corresponding to the normal symbol holding display 5041 is displayed.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 5226, the state of the LED 5045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize information by the combination of the LED 5045.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the identification means 5220 is arranged to overlap the first layer 5230 on the front side of the cover member 5202 other than the window 5206 on the first layer 5230 which is easy to transmit light, and from the first layer 5230. Is a sheet having a second layer 5232 that hardly transmits light. In other words, the part corresponding to the transmission part 5222 is configured only by the first layer 5230 that transmits light, and the part corresponding to the shielding part 5224 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 5230 and the second layer 5232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5224. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5230 is disposed on the cover member 5202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification unit 5220 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5232 on a sheet made of the first layer 5230 by painting, printing, or the like. Absent.

  When the display device 5008 is attached to the plate member 2400 of the game board 102A, the rear connector 5100 is exposed to the rear side of the game board 102A. The display device 5008 can be attached to and detached from the connector 5100 in a state of being attached to the plate member 2400, and is easy to use.

  The cover member 5202 includes a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which the front cover portion 5208, the side cover portion 5210, the window defining portion 5212, the engagement receiving portion 5216, the alignment portion 5700, and the like are integrally formed. The molded product which consists of is used. In addition, as the protection member 5204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which each part such as the engaging part 5214 is integrally formed is used.

  Note that the display substrate 5200 is difficult to remove or reassemble from the cover member 5202 by welding or bonding the display substrate 5200 to the cover member 5202 in a state where the surface is covered with the cover member 5202. You may attach in the state in which a removal trace remains.

  Next, the first and second special symbol indicators 5000 and 5010, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 5001 and 5011, the probability variation indicator 5020, the hourly indicator 5021, the right-handed indicator 5022, and the big hit round number display The device 5030, the normal symbol display device 5040, and the normal symbol hold display device 5041 will be described in detail.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol indicator 5000 displays the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 5000 stops and displays a big hit symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is done.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 5010 displays the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. In the second special symbol display 5010, a big hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped manner. Is done.

  The first and second special symbol indicators 5000 and 5010 are each composed of six LEDs 5045 arranged in a line, and each LED 5045 is turned on or off according to the symbols to be stopped and displayed. By the way, when a game ball is newly won in the first starting device 112 while the symbol variation display or the big hit game related to the first special symbol determination is being performed, the first is triggered by this winning. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment reserves the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting device 112. It is configured. The first special symbol hold display 5001 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  Similarly, when a game ball is newly won in the second starting device 115 while the symbol change display or jackpot game related to the second special symbol determination is being performed, 2. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment reserves the right of the second special symbol determination when the second special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even if a game ball wins the second starting device 115. It is configured. The second special symbol hold display 5011 displays the number of hold of the second special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holds can be made for each of the first and second special symbol determinations. Each of the first and second special symbol hold indicators 5001 and 5011 is composed of two adjacent LEDs 5045. When the number of holdings is 0, the two LEDs 5045 are turned off. When the number of holdings is 1, the right LED 5045 is turned on and the left LED 5045 is turned off. When the number is two, two LEDs 5045 are lit. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, the right LED 5045 blinks and the left LED 5045 is lit, and when the number of holdings is 4, two LEDs 5045 are blinking.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 5040 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the stop symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 113b, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 5040, for example, the normal symbol Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display unit 5041 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way.

  The normal symbol display 5040 is composed of three LEDs 5045 arranged in a line, and each LED 5045 is turned on or off according to the stop symbol. In the present embodiment, up to four holds can be performed for the normal symbol determination.

  The normal symbol hold indicator 5041 is composed of two adjacent LEDs 5045. Similar to the first and second special symbol hold indicators 5001 and 5011, when the number of holds is zero, the two LEDs 5045 are turned off. When the number of holdings is 1, the right LED 5045 is turned on, the left LED 5045 is turned off, and when the number of holdings is 2, the two LEDs 5045 are turned on. Become. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, the right LED 5045 blinks and the left LED 5045 is lit, and when the number of holdings is 4, two LEDs 5045 are blinking.

  In the following description, a symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 5000 or the second special symbol display device 5010 is called a “special symbol”, and a symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 5040 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

  In the present embodiment, “normal game state” and “probability game state” are provided as states related to the big hit determination. The “normal gaming state” refers to a gaming state that has a relatively low probability of being a big hit in the special symbol determination, and the “probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state that has a relatively high probability.

  The probability variation display device 5020 indicates a state related to the big hit determination of the gaming machine 100 and includes one LED 5045. When the “normal game state” is set, the LED 5045 is turned off. When the “probability changed game state” is set, the LED 5045 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, “non-short game state” and “short-time game state” are provided as states relating to the movable piece 115b of the second starter 115. It should be noted that the state relating to the jackpot determination (the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state) and the state relating to the movable piece 115b (the non-short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other and are independent. You can also.

  In this embodiment, “non-short game state” means that the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol determination is set to be as long as 12 seconds, and the opening control time of the second starter 115 when winning is won is 0 A game state that is set as short as 2 seconds. In other words, when a game ball passes through the gate 113b, a normal symbol lottery is performed and the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 5040, but the normal symbol is stopped 12 seconds after the variable display is started. indicate. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting device 115 is opened for about 0.2 seconds by the operation of the movable piece 115b after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol determination is set to 3 seconds, which is shorter than the “non-short-time gaming state”, and the second start when winning in the win This means that the opening control time of the device 115 is 3.5 seconds, which is set to be longer than the “non-short game state”. Furthermore, in the “non-short game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination is set to 1/65536, and in the “short time game state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol determination is set to 65535/65536. The

  The time reduction indicator 5021 indicates a state related to the movable piece 115b, and includes one LED 5045. When it is in the “non-short game state”, the LED 5045 is turned off, and when it is in the “short time game state”, the LED 5045 is turned on.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, right-handed is required to generate a winning to the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127. In some cases, left-handed is required to generate a prize for the first starting device 112.

  The right-handed indicator 5022 indicates whether right-handed or left-handed should be performed, and includes one LED 5045. When left-handed is required, the LED 5045 is turned off. When right-handed is required, the LED 5045 is turned on.

  Moreover, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is comprised from several rounds. The jackpot round number display 5030 indicates a round of jackpot game, and includes eight LEDs 5045. During the big hit game, each LED 5045 is turned on or off according to the current round.

  The sub display 2420 has the same configuration as the display unit 7100 of the embodiment C described later, and includes 10 LEDs as an example.

  It should be noted that both or one of the display 5008 and the sub-display 2420 are, as described above, the first and second special symbol displays 5000 and 5010, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 5001 and 5011, and the probability change display. Unit 5020, hour-speed indicator 5021, right-handed indicator 5022, jackpot round number indicator 5030, ordinary symbol indicator 5040, ordinary symbol hold indicator 5041, and each of these indicators 5000 to 5041 is a main control. Connected to the output port.

<Embodiment B>
The display device 5008 may be configured as in the embodiment B described below, instead of the embodiment A described above. In addition, the structure peculiar to the display 5008 of embodiment B is mainly demonstrated, and description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally about the structure similar to embodiment a.

  The display 5008 of the embodiment B has a plurality of LEDs 6245 arranged in two rows. In the case of displaying information related to the profits given to the player by the game only with the display 5008, these LEDs 6245 are provided with the first and second special symbol displays 6700 and 6710, the first and second special symbol hold. A display 6701, 6711, a probability change display 6720, a time reduction display 6721, a right-handed display 6722, a jackpot round number display 6730, a normal symbol display 6740, and a normal symbol hold display 6741 are configured. The LEDs 6245 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch path of the game balls formed by the rails 5910a and 5910b. Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 6245 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 6245 may be arranged in one row along the launch path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. They may be arranged regardless of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the indicator 5008 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 5900 installed on the game board 102A, and the front side is covered with the covering member 5900. The covering member 5900 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board 102A, and is composed of a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending backward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It is in the shape of a box that opens to the top (FIG. 60). Here, the “front / rear area” is an area that can be provided to provide a game area 106 through which a game ball passes on the front side of the plate member 2400, and rails 5910 a, 5910 b, game nails, and starters 112, 115 are provided in the front and rear areas. Parts such as a winning opening and a gate 113b are arranged. The covering member 5900 is disposed so that the front surface thereof is substantially the same as the front ends of the rails 5910a and 5910b, and also serves as a board decoration when disposed outside the outer rail 5910a (game area 106) as in this embodiment. There is. In the case where the display device 5008 is arranged inside the game area 106, a part of the game parts installed in the game area 106 such as the starter devices 112 and 115 and the big prize device may be constituted by the covering member 5900. Good.

  The covering member 5900 has a portion covering the front side of the display device 5008 that is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 6206 of the display device 5008. The state is configured to be visible. The covering member 5900 is attached to the plate member 2400 of the game board 102A in a replaceable manner by screwing or the like. The indicator 5008 is attached to the covering member 5900 so as to be housed inside the covering member 5900. At this time, the display 5008 faces the back side of the game board 102A (plate member 2400), and the back side of the game board 102A with respect to a connector 6301 (FIG. 63) described later provided so as to face the back side. It becomes accessible from. In this manner, the covering member 5900 can be attached to and detached from the plate member 2400 with the display device 5008 attached, and the covering member 5900 can be easily replaced in accordance with the replacement of the display device 5008 or the change of the model. is there.

  Since the display device 5008 is covered with the covering member 5900, it is difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, it is possible to save time until the display substrate 6300 is reached, and it is possible to further prevent fraud.

  The display device 5008 of this embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 5900 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 5900 from the plate member 2400, it can be easily replaced when the display device 5008 breaks down. Note that the display device 5008 is attached to the covering member 5900 by bonding or the like in a configuration in which it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or when the display member 5008 is removed from the covering member 5900 so that traces remain on either the display member 5008 or the covering member 5900. May be. In other words, the attachment structure of the display device 5008 and the covering member 5900 has a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 5900 or the display device 5008, or the covering member 5900 or the display device 5008 is broken or deformed by the removal. Thus, at least one of the configurations that cannot be assembled as in the original, the configuration in which the covering member 5900 or the display device 5008 is broken or deformed by the removal, and the coating member 5900 or the display device 5008 leaves a trace of removal. It may be.

  As shown in FIGS. 64, 65, and 66, the display device 5008 includes a display substrate 6300 on which a plurality of LEDs 6245 are surface-mounted, and a cover member 6402 that covers at least the front side of the display substrate 6300. ing. The display 5008 is installed in a standing posture so that the display substrate 6300 disposed on the rear side of the cover member 6402 is along the board surface of the game board 102A. The display unit 5008 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside with respect to the front surface of the display substrate 6300 by the cover member 6402. The indicator 5008 is attached to the covering member 5900, and the light of the LED 6245 can be visually recognized by the player through the covering member 5900. Further, the display 5008 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 102A (plate member 2400), and a connector 6301 (FIG. 63) provided so as to face the back side can be accessed from the back side of the game board 102A. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the display substrate 6300 has the same configuration as that of the embodiment A, and is a case where only the display 5008 displays information related to the profits given to the player in the game. The first special symbol display 6700 is composed of six LEDs 6245 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol display 6710 is composed of six LEDs 6245 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold indicator 6701 is composed of two LEDs 6245 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 6700 and the second special symbol indicator 6710, and the second special symbol hold indicator 6711 is It consists of two LEDs 6245 on the right side of the second special symbol display 6710. On the right side of the second special symbol holding display 6711, an LED 6245 constituting each of them is arranged one by one in the order of a probability variation display 6720, a time-shortening display 6721, and a right-handed display 6722. The jackpot round number display 6730 is composed of eight LEDs 6245 on the left side of the lower row, the normal symbol display 6740 is composed of three LEDs 6245 on the right side of the jackpot round number display 6730, and the normal symbol hold indicator 6741 is , Composed of two LEDs 6245 from the right side of the lower row.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in this embodiment, current limiting means 6900 and 6910 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 6245 are provided on the main control board 300 side. Note that the current control means 6900 and 6910 may be provided on the effect control board 320 as long as the display device 5008 is electrically connected to the effect control board 320. As shown in FIG. 69, by mounting a resistor 6900 as a current limiting unit on the main control board 300 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 5045 to a predetermined value or less, an excessive current flows through each LED 5045. Is preventing. The resistor 6900 may be through-hole mounted to fix the lead of the resistor 6900 to the hole of the printed circuit board, but may be surface mounted to the main control board 300. As a result, the main control board 300 does not protrude a lead for connecting the resistor 6900 to the circuit on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 6900, and can effectively use the surface opposite to the mounting surface.

  The resistor 6900 may be disposed on the other surface opposite to the surface on which the electrical component of the main control board 300 is mounted at a position corresponding to the mounting region of the electrical component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 6900 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either completely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 300 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 6900 on one surface of the main control board 300, the mounting of the resistor 6900 does not affect the front surface of the display substrate 5200 like through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 300 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 300.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the current control means 6910 may be provided as a driver in the main control means 300. The current limiting unit 6910 prevents the excessive current from flowing through each LED 5045 by limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 5045 to be a predetermined value or less. Thus, by providing the current limiting means 6900, 6910 on the main control board 300 side, the resistance of the display board 6300 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the display board 6300 can be made more compact and the display 5008 can be made compact. Can be reduced in size.

  As shown in FIGS. 62, 64, and 65, the cover member 6402 includes a front cover portion 6208 in which windows 6206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 6245 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 6300 are formed, and a front cover portion. A lateral cover portion 6410 formed so as to rise to the rear side is provided at the periphery of 6208. The cover member 6402 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 6208 and the lateral cover portion 6410, and the display substrate 6300 is accommodated in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 6208 and the lateral cover portion 6410. It is possible. When the display substrate 6300 is stored in the inner region of the cover member 6402, the display substrate 6300 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 6410 (this embodiment) or more than the open end. Positioned on the front cover 6208 side (front side), the entire display substrate 6300 is housed in the inner region of the cover member 6402. In other words, the cover member 6402 covers the front surface of the display substrate 6300 on which the LED 6245 is mounted with the front cover portion 6208, covers the peripheral surface of the display substrate 6300 with the horizontal cover portion 6410, and displays due to the presence of the cover member 6402. It is difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the substrate 6300 from the outside. The cover member 6402 according to this embodiment has an inner region formed to match a part of the outer edge of the display substrate 6300, and when the display substrate 6300 is accommodated in the inner region, the display substrate 6300 is formed on the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 6410. The display substrate 6300 can be held so as not to be misaligned.

  In this manner, since the display substrate 6300 is disposed in a state of being accommodated in the cover member 6402, it is difficult to access the display substrate 6300 from the front side or the lateral side, and illegal acts on the display substrate 6300 are prevented. can do. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the display substrate 6300, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 6300 from the cover member 6402 because it is difficult to access the display substrate 6300 as described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 68, the cover member 6402 has a window 6206 penetrating the front cover portion 6208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 6245 by a window defining portion 6812 formed in the front cover portion 6208. Has been. The window 6206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 6245 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 6245 among the plurality of LEDs 6245. The window 6206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle (this embodiment) or a circular shape, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 6245 so that the corresponding one or more LEDs 6245 are entirely inside. Yes. In the cover member 6402, the windows 6206 are formed in two rows. When the cover member 6402 is disposed in a state where the front side of the display substrate 6300 is covered, the windows 6206 are disposed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 6245. Thus, the lighting state of each LED 6245 facing each window 6206 can be visually recognized through the window 6206. The configuration of the window defining unit 6812 is the same as that of the embodiment a.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the cover member 6402 includes an alignment portion 6800 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 6208. The alignment portion 6800 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 6812 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 6812 facing the front surface of the display substrate 6300. The alignment portion 6800 is configured to fit into a substrate hole 6750 (FIG. 67) formed in the display substrate 6300 and to align the display substrate 6300 with respect to the cover member 6402. In the cover member 6402, a plurality of alignment portions 6800 are arranged in a distributed manner on the rear surface of the front cover portion 6208 so as to be separated from each other. Of the plurality of alignment portions 6800, there may be one formed separately from the window defining portion 6812. Each alignment portion 6800 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 6800 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 6812, and its rear end is positioned rearward of the rear end of the lateral cover portion 6410 and protrudes from the cover member 6402.

  The display substrate 6300 includes a substrate hole 6750 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 6750 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 6800. The substrate hole 6750 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 6800. The alignment portion 6800 and the substrate hole 6750 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 6800 is fitted into the substrate hole 6750, and the display substrate 6300 is relatively positioned in the inner region of the cover member 6402. Is defined. Accordingly, the cover member 6402 and the display substrate 6300 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting the alignment portion 6800 and the substrate hole 6750. The positional relationship between the alignment unit 6800 and the connector 6301 is the same as that in the embodiment (a).

  As described above, the cover member 6402 and the display substrate 6300 are assembled in a state of being positioned with each other by fitting between the alignment portion 6800 and the substrate hole 6750, so that the LED 6245 and the window 6206 corresponding thereto are assembled. Alignment can be performed without deviation, and the state of the LED 6245 can be identified more suitably. Further, since the alignment portion 6800 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 6812 and reinforced by the window defining portion 6812, the alignment portion 6800 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining portion 6812. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 6800 integrally with the window defining portion 6812, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 6800 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the cover member 6402 and the display substrate 6300 are assembled by an engagement structure in which the alignment portion 6800 is melted and engaged with the display substrate 6300. When reassembly is difficult, or when disassembled, the cover member 6402 and the display substrate 6300 are configured to leave a trace of removal. Specifically, when the alignment portion 6800 and the substrate hole 6750 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 6800 protruding from the rear surface of the display substrate 6300 is melted to be larger than the substrate hole 6750. By crushing, a latching portion 6800a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 6800. The display substrate 6300 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining portion 6812 and the hooking portion 6800 a of the alignment portion 6800 and fixed to the cover member 6402.

  As described above, according to the engagement structure described above, it is difficult to remove the display substrate 6300 from the cover member 6402, and the display substrate 6300 is protected by the cover member 6402, thereby preventing an illegal act on the display substrate 6300. it can. In addition, when the latching portion 6800a is destroyed and the display substrate 6300 is forcibly removed from the cover member 6402, a trace of the latching portion 6800a being destroyed remains on the cover member 6402, and there is an illegal act. Becomes easier. Further, when the display substrate 6300 is forcibly removed from the cover member 6402, the latching portion 6800a is broken, so that the display substrate 6300 cannot be reattached to the cover member 6402, and reassembly becomes difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, on the front side of the cover member 6402, an identification unit 6420 capable of identifying the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 6245 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 6245 is arranged. The identification means 6420 may be an arrangement associated with the display by the LED 6245 or the LED 6245 such as only the cover member 6402, only the covering member 5900, or dispersedly provided on the cover member 6402 and the covering member 5900. In addition, the identification unit 6420 may be any configuration such as a configuration in which the cover member 6402 or the covering member 5900 is attached to the front surface or the rear surface, or a configuration provided in the cover member 6402 or the covering member 5900. The identification means 6420 of this embodiment includes a first identification unit 6422 provided on the front surface of the cover member 6402 and a second identification unit 6424 provided on the front surface of the covering member 5900, and the front side of the first identification unit 6422. The second identification unit 6424 is arranged so as to overlap. As shown in FIG. 59, the identification unit 6420 includes a third identification unit 5902 provided separately from the second identification unit 6424 on the front surface of the covering member 5900.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the first identification unit 6422 is provided on the front side of the window 6206, and a transmission unit 6226 as a first region that can transmit light or influence transmitted light, and the transmission unit 6226 A shielding portion 6428 is provided as a second region that is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmission portion 6226. The first identification unit 6422 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the cover member 6402. The first identification part 6422 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface area of the cover member 6402 where the window 6206 opens. In this embodiment, the first identification part 6422 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the cover member 6402. Has been. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 6422 and the cover member 6402 are bonded by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 6422. However, the size of the first identification unit 6422 and the attachment to the cover member 6402 The method is not limited to this. In addition, the 1st identification part 6422 may be provided with the combination area | region which shows the light emission aspect of 2 or more LED6245 as a combination similarly to Embodiment a.

  The transmitting portion 6226 is located on the front side of the window 6206 of the cover member 6402 and can transmit light emitted from the LED 6245 corresponding to the window 6206. The transmission part 6226 is provided so as to cover the entire front side opening of the window 6206, and the front side opening of the window 6206 is covered by the transmission part 6226 on the front side of the window 6206. The transmissive portion 6226 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 5045 disposed inside the window 6206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, a mode in which the LED 6245 is difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, a mode in which light emitted from the LED 6245 is colored by being colored, A mode in which the light irradiated from the LED 6245 is diffused and diffused, a mode in which the light is converged and the light irradiated from the LED 6245 is reduced, a mode in which these are combined, and the like are combined in this embodiment. Light is diffused by the transmissive portion 6226. The transmission part 6226 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the cover member 6402, and is arranged according to the plurality of windows 6206 provided in the cover member 6402. Is provided. In other words, the first identification portion 6422 is formed with a transmissive portion 6226 having a square shape matching the window 6206 and the same size as the window 6206, and the transmissive portion 6226 closes the front opening of the window 6206 without any gaps. .

  As described above, since the front side of the window 6206 is covered with the transmissive portion 6226, it is possible to make it difficult to access the LED 6245 mounted on the surface of the display substrate 6300 from the front side of the display device 5008. In other words, the transmissive portion 6226 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the display substrate 6300 through the window 6206 that penetrates to the inside of the cover member 6402. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 6245 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 6226, the state of the LED 6245 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 6245 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 6226, a shielding portion 6428 is provided that is configured such that light is less likely to pass than the transmissive portion 6226 that covers the window 6206. In other words, the shielding portion 6428 is disposed on the front side of the cover member 6402 so as to surround the window 6206. The shielding part 6428 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 6226, and in this embodiment, forms a part other than the transmission part 6226 in one sheet constituting the first identification part 6422. The shielding portion 6428 is disposed so as to overlap with a region other than the window 6206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 6208 of the cover member 6402 so that it does not cover the inside of the window 6206. The shielding portion 6428 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low brightness level (which absorbs light well). Is different.

  As described above, since the shielding portion 6428 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive portion 6226, the transmissive portion 6226 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 6245 recognized through the transmissive portion 6226 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 6206 and the transmission portion 6226 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 6206 is not visible because it is not directly visible. In addition, if the transmission part 6226 is placed on the window 6206, the transmission part 6226 surrounded by the shielding part 6428 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 6245 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 6428 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 6226 is set to the same sheet, but the front surface of the front cover part 6208 of the cover member 6402 is set as the shielding part 6428, and the transparent part of the sheet is interposed therebetween. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 6428 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 6428 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the first identification unit 6422 is disposed so as to overlap the first layer 6530 that is easy to transmit light and the first layer 6530 on the front side of the cover member 6402 other than the window 6206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 6531 that is less likely to transmit light than 6530. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 6226 is configured only by the first layer 6530 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 6428 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 6530 and the second layer 6428. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 6531, light is difficult to transmit in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 6428. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 6530 is disposed on the cover member 6402 side (rear side), and the second layer 6531 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 6422 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 6531 on a sheet made of the first layer 6530 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the transmission unit 6226 and the shielding unit 6428. There is no step.

  By configuring the first identification portion 6422 in this manner, even if the window 6206 and the transmission portion 6226 are misaligned, light can be guided to the transmission portion 6226 by the first layer 6530, and the shielding portion 6428 is obtained. Since the transmissive portion 6226 surrounded by the light shines, the influence on the identification of the LED 6245 can be reduced. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 6428, the light incident on the first layer 6530 is blocked by the front second layer 6531 and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmission portion 6226 can be clearly identified.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the second identification unit 6424 is located on the front side of the window 6206 and is attached to the covering member 5900. The second identification portion 6424 is provided on the front side of the window 6206, and is provided around the light passing portion 6432 and the light passing portion 6432 as a first region that can transmit light or influence the light that passes therethrough. The light-shielding part 6434 as a 2nd area | region which is hard to permeate | transmit light rather than the light transmission part 6432 is provided. In addition, the second identification unit 6424 may include a combination area 5904 displayed on the light shielding unit 6434 and indicating the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 6245 as a combination. The second identification portion 6424 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 5900. The second identification portion 6434 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 6206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 6206 is covered by one second identification portion 6424. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 6424 and the covering member 5900 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 6424. However, the size of the second identification portion 6424, the method of attaching to the covering member 5900, etc. It is not limited to this.

  The light transmitting portion 6432 of the present embodiment is positioned on the front side of the window 6206 of the cover member 6402 so that the light emitted from the LED 6245 corresponding to the window 6206 can be transmitted or has an effect on the transmitted light. It has become. The light passing portion 6432 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 6206, and the state of the LED 6245 can be visually recognized through the window 6206 by the light passing portion 6432 on the front side of the window 6206. The light transmitting unit 6432 of the present embodiment is configured to be transparent and formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 6206. Note that the light transmitting unit 6432 may be configured to affect the transmitted light, similarly to the transmitting unit 6226 of the first identifying unit 6422. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 6245 by the light passing portion 6432, it becomes easier to identify the state of the LED 6245 and to distinguish the state of the adjacent LED 6245.

  Around the light passing portion 6432, there is provided a light blocking portion 6434 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the light passing portion 6432 that covers the window 6206. In other words, the light shielding portion 6434 is disposed so as to surround the window 6206 on the front side of the cover member 6402. The light shielding unit 6434 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light transmitting unit 6432. In the present embodiment, a portion other than the light transmitting unit 6432 is configured in one sheet constituting the second identifying unit 6424. The light shielding portion 6434 is disposed so as to overlap with an area other than the window 6206 on the front side of the cover member 6402 so as not to cover the inside of the window 6206. The light-shielding portion 6434 is composed of a dark color with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well) such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black or a cold color such as amber. Is different.

  As described above, since the light shielding portion 6434 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the light passing portion 6432, the light passing portion 6432 can be easily understood, and the LED 6245 recognized through the light passing portion 6432 can be recognized. The situation becomes easier to distinguish. Further, even if the window 6206 and the light transmitting portion 6432 are misaligned, it can be difficult to understand the misalignment.

  The light shielding unit 6434 is not limited to the configuration of setting the same sheet of the light transmitting unit 6432, and the front surface of the covering member 5900 corresponding to the front side of the window 6206 is set as the light shielding unit 6434 so that the transparent portion of the sheet Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding portion 6434 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet via the front side of the light shielding portion 6434 may be possible. The covering member 5900 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 6206, and the opening may be blocked by the second identification portion 6424 (the light transmitting portion 6432 and / or the light shielding portion 6434).

  The combination area 5904 is partitioned by a partition mark 5906 including a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the light shielding portion 6434. The division mark 5906 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light transmitting portions 6432, and the combination area 5904 surrounded by the division mark 5906 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, first and second special symbol display units 6700 and 6710, first and second special symbol hold display units 6701 and 6711, probability variation display unit 6720, hourly display unit 6721, right-handed display unit 6722, jackpot round number display unit Among these, in the 6730, the normal symbol display 6740, and the normal symbol hold display 6741, among these, a plurality of LEDs 6245 (the transmission unit 6226 or the light transmission unit 6432) constitute the display unit, and the LED 6245 corresponding to the display unit. A group of (the transmitting portion 6226 or the light transmitting portion 6432) is surrounded by a division mark 5906 to form a combination region 5904 corresponding to each display. Note that the section mark 5906 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may be any structure that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 5904. .

  Specifically, a combination area 5904 corresponding to the first special symbol display 6700 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 5906 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 6245 on the left side of the upper row. A combination area 5904 corresponding to the second special symbol display 6710 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 5906 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 6245 in the upper row. A combination corresponding to the first special symbol hold indicator 6701 by surrounding it with a partition mark 5906 so as to correspond to two LEDs 6245 arranged between the first special symbol indicator 6700 and the second special symbol indicator 6710. An area 5904 is displayed. A combination area 5904 corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator 6711 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 5906 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 6245 on the right side of the second special symbol indicator 6710. Further, a combination area 5904 corresponding to the jackpot round number display 6730 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 5906 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 6245 on the left side of the lower row. A combination area 5904 corresponding to the normal symbol display 6740 is displayed by surrounding it with the division mark 5906 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 6245 on the right side of the big hit round number display 6730. A combination area 5904 corresponding to the normal symbol hold indicator 6741 is displayed by being surrounded by the partition mark 5906 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 6245 from the lower right side.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 5904, the states of the LEDs 6245 in the area are recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize the information by the combination of the LEDs 6245.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the second identification unit 6424 is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the first layer 6536 other than the first layer 6536 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 6206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 6538 that is less likely to transmit light than 6536. In other words, the light passing portion 6432 corresponding to the window 6206 is configured by only the first layer 6536 that transmits light, and the portions corresponding to the light blocking portion 6434 that is difficult to transmit light are the first layer 6536 and the second layer 6538. It is comprised by the laminated part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 6538, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and the light is prevented from being transmitted from the light shielding portion 6434. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 6536 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 6538 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 6424 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 6538 on a sheet formed of the first layer 6536 by painting or printing, and is visible between the light transmission unit 6432 and the light shielding unit 6434. There is no step.

  The third identification unit 5902 is an area where various types of information are displayed. In the present embodiment, the third identification unit 5902 is attached to the covering member 5900 in the same manner as the second identification unit 6424. The third identification portion 5902 is formed in a sheet shape, and is disposed on the front surface of the covering member 5900 at a position different from the second identification portion 6424 (upper side in the present embodiment). In the third identification unit 5902, the displayed information is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 5902 and the covering member 5900 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 5902. However, the size of the third identification portion 5902, the attachment method to the covering member 5900, etc. It is not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 5902 may be displayed on the second identification unit 6424 or the first identification unit 6422 or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 6420, and the third identification unit 5902 may be omitted. .

  In this manner, by providing the third identification unit 5902, more information can be displayed, and information displayed on the display device 5008 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing each information and sorting and displaying it on a plurality of identification units 5902, 6422, and 6424, it is possible to flexibly cope with changes such as when changing the model.

  The identification units 5902, 6422, and 6424 (identification means 6420) may be configured to cover the peripheral surface with the protection unit 6008 (FIG. 60). In the present embodiment, a protective portion 6008 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 5900, the peripheral surface of the second identifying portion 6424 attached to the front surface of the covering member 5900, and the third identifying portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 5900. Each of the peripheral surfaces of 5902 is covered with a protection part 6008. Specifically, the protection unit 6008 is configured by a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed in accordance with the shape of the identification unit 5902, 6424 corresponding to the attachment position of the identification unit 5902, 6424. Yes. Further, the concave portion of the covering member 5900 has a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the identification portions 5902 and 6424. The protective portion 6008 faces the peripheral surface of the identification portions 5902 and 6424 fitted and attached to the concave portions, and the identification portion. The entire circumference of 5902, 6424 is surrounded by a protection portion 6008.

  Thus, by covering the peripheral surface of the identification units 5902 and 6424 with the protection unit 6008, it is possible to make it difficult for the protection unit 6008 to access the identification units 5902 and 6424. It is possible to prevent 5902 and 6424 from being removed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as changing the identification portions 5902 and 6424 or removing the identification portions 5902 and 6424 to access the display substrate 6300. Further, by attaching the identification portions 5902 and 6424 to the covering member 5900 with the protection portion 6008 as a reference, the identification portions 5902 and 6424 can be aligned. In particular, since the second identification portion 6424 that overlaps the front side of the window 6206 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 6245 can be more appropriately determined.

  In this embodiment, the protection unit 6008 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification units 5902 and 6424. However, the protection unit 6008 is provided on a part of the circumferential surface of the identification units 5902, 6422, and 6424 (identification means 6420). The structure provided correspondingly may be sufficient.

  The information displayed on the identification means 6420 includes a gaming state that assists or explains information (may be referred to as gaming state information in the description) that is displayed on the display device 5008 and is related to the benefits that are given to the player in the game. Display, unique display indicating unique information such as model name, the probability of the gaming machine 100 (for example, 1/399), the rate of probability change of the gaming machine 100 (for example, 80/100, etc.), and the number of rounds per jackpot ( For example, spec display indicating spec information such as 16R, 4R, etc. may be displayed alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods visible to the player.

  For example, as the game state display, as in the embodiment described above, by forming the combination area 5904 surrounded by the division mark 5906, the state of the plurality of LEDs 6245 in the combination area 5904 is associated and recognized as a combination, The game state information displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 6245 may be easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 61 is an explanation showing an example of a game state display applied corresponding to the big hit round number display 6730. The same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the embodiment B, and the explanation is omitted. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the game status display 6110 includes a jackpot at a position that is known to correspond to the jackpot round number display 6730, such as a position corresponding to the side of the jackpot round number display 6730. The pattern which represents the round number display 6730 typically, and the structure which describes the display mode and round number of LED6245 for every round may be sufficient. The game status display 6110 in FIG. 61A describes the game status information (number of rounds) displayed by a combination of a plurality of LEDs 6245 of the big hit round number display 6730. Therefore, by referring to the game status display 6110 of FIG. 61A, it is possible to easily identify the game status information (number of rounds) indicated by the big hit round number display 6730.

  Further, as the game state display 6110, signs such as numbers and symbols are arranged corresponding to the LED 6245 at a position corresponding to the side of the LED 6245 (FIG. 61 (b)) or on the front side (FIG. 61 (c)). Further, a configuration for assisting the recognition by associating the states of the LEDs 6245 as combinations with the signs, or a configuration for explaining the states of the LEDs 6245 may be employed. The label may be a color or a shape difference.

  The identification unit 6420 is divided into a first identification unit 6422 provided on the cover member 6402 and a second identification unit 6424 provided on the covering member 5900 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 6206. Since the functions required of the identification unit 6420 can be assigned to the two identification units 6422 and 6424, the configuration of the identification units 6422 and 6424 can be simplified. In addition, by assigning and setting the functions required of the identification unit 6420 to the two identification units 6422 and 6424, the state of the LED 6245 can be more clearly distinguished, and the state of the LED 6245 can be more easily understood. In addition, by arranging the first identification unit 6422 and the second identification unit 6424 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 6422 and 6424.

  Since the covering member 5900 is attached to the game board 102A in a replaceable manner, when the model is changed, if the covering member 5900 is removed from the game board 102A and replaced, the identification portions 5902 and 6424 provided on the covering member 5900 are replaced. It can be easily exchanged. If the unique display and the spec display are performed by the covering member 5900, the covering member 5900 can be replaced to correspond to another model. In addition, since the first identification unit 6422 is provided on the cover member 6402, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 5900.

<Embodiment C>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display 5008 of the embodiment C is different. Therefore, a configuration unique to the display device 5008 of this embodiment will be described, and a description of a configuration similar to that of Embodiment A will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the display device 5008 includes one or a plurality of display units.
FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the display portion 7100 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the display portion 7100 as viewed from the bottom side.

  The display portion 7100 includes a cover member 7110 and a display substrate 7200 having 10 LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. The cover member 7110 includes a plate-like pedestal portion 7130 that forms the bottom of the cover member 7110, and a triangular prism-shaped protrusion portion 7120 that protrudes from the pedestal portion 7130. The corners on the side surfaces of the projecting portion 7120 are chamfered, and the display portion 7100 is arranged with the top portion of the projecting portion 7120 facing the player.

  The protrusion 7120 is formed with ten light guide hole portions 7140 as windows that penetrate the protrusion 7120 along the protrusion direction. The pedestal portion 7130 of the cover member 7110 is attached to the display substrate 7200 so as to cover the surface thereof, and each light guide hole portion 7140 corresponds to an LED surface-mounted on the surface of the display substrate 7200. Arranged in position. Thereby, it becomes possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protruding portion 7120 through the light guide hole 7140.

  On the other hand, a connector 7210 wired to an LED mounted on the front surface is provided on the back surface of the display substrate 7200 (see FIG. 72), and the LED and the main control board 300 are connected via the connector 7210. Connected.

  The display substrate 7200 is welded to the pedestal portion 7130 of the cover member 7110, whereby the display substrate 7200 is difficult to remove, reassemble, and disassemble with respect to the cover member 7110. 7110 or the display substrate 7200 is attached with a trace remaining.

  Note that the method for attaching the display substrate 7200 to the cover member 7110 (the pedestal portion 7130) is not limited to this. For example, by attaching the display substrate 7200 using caulking, an adhesive, or the like, The cover member 7110 or the display substrate 7200 may be attached in a state in which traces remain when it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble.

  In addition, the shape of the protruding portion 7120 is not limited to the triangular prism shape, but may be various shapes such as a cylindrical shape and a quadrangular prism shape. In this embodiment, as an example, 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the display substrate 7200, and 10 light guide hole portions 7140 corresponding to each LED are formed in the cover member 7110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of LEDs and a light guide hole.

The display 5008 includes one or a plurality of display units 7100, and displays information related to profits given to the player in the game, as in the case of the embodiment a.
FIG. 73 is a front view of each display unit 7100 when the display device 5008 is configured with four display units 7100 as an example. These display portions 7100 may be arranged together in the lower left of the game area 106 adjacent to the outer rail 5910a, or may be separately arranged around the game area 106, as in the embodiment A.

  The display unit 7100 in FIG. 73A is configured as a first special symbol holding display 7300 composed of four LEDs and a first special symbol display 7310 composed of six LEDs.

  Moreover, the display part 7100 of FIG. 73 (B) is comprised as the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance display 7320 comprised from four LED, and the 2nd special symbol display 7330 comprised from six LED. .

  Further, the display portion 7100 in FIG. 73 (C) includes a normal symbol holding display 7340 composed of four LEDs, a normal symbol display 7350 composed of three LEDs, and one LED. Are configured as a probability change display 7360, a time reduction display 7370, and a right-handed display 7380.

  Further, the display portion 7100 in FIG. 73D is configured as a jackpot round number display 7390 including ten LEDs. Of course, these are examples of the configuration of the display device 5008, and the display device 5008 may be configured by one or a plurality of display units 7100. It is also possible to configure a special symbol hold indicator, a special symbol indicator, a normal symbol hold indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a jackpot round number indicator, or the like by a plurality of display units 7100.

<Other embodiments>
As described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the technical scope thereof.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED is exemplified as the means for displaying the game state information on the display (display means). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an organic EL or other light emitter may be used. In addition, as a light-emitting body, it is desirable from a viewpoint of compacting etc. that surface mounting is possible.

  The display board is not limited to a plate shape, and may be any display board (display means) provided with the above-described light emitter as means for displaying game state information. In the display device (display means), a structure in which a light emitter is mounted and a circuit for the light emitter is provided can also be referred to as a light emitter.

  In the embodiment described above, the configuration in which the cover member of the display (display means) is covered with the covering member is illustrated, but a covering member provided on the game board may be used as the cover member of the display. Further, the cover member of the display (display means) may be used as the covering member. A structure that covers at least the front side of the display substrate (light emitting means) and protects the display substrate (light emitting means), refers to both the covering member and the cover member, or one of the covering member and the cover member, and serves as the covering means. Can be caught.

  In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which an identification unit is provided corresponding to the display unit (display unit) to help identify game state information displayed by the state of the LED of the display unit (display unit). Not limited. For example, an information display unit may be provided that displays or displays the above-described unique display or spec display, which has a direct relationship with or adjacent to the display device (display means) and is not directly related to the game state information. Therefore, the front side of the display (display means) and the front side of the window may be covered. As described above, an information display unit may be provided instead of or in addition to the above-described mode of displaying the unique display or the spec display on the identification unit.

  The identification means is not limited to be configured so that the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs can be identified individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs, and the display unit (display unit) corresponds to the display unit (display unit). Any configuration may be used as long as it assists in identifying the game state information displayed by the LED state. As an identification mode, an information auxiliary mode that makes it easy to grasp the meaning of the state of the LED by providing a label or the like corresponding to the LED, or a relationship between the first region that transmits light and the second region that hardly transmits light As described above, a discrimination assisting mode including a single unit or a combination thereof is included, such as a mode in which the LED state is easily discriminated (easily viewed). In particular, the information assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as an information assisting unit, and the discrimination assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as a discrimination assisting unit.

  In the display device (display means), the configuration arranged on the front side of the window is not limited to the above-described identification means, and is a protective means that is disposed so as to cover the window and prevents fraud through the window. May be. For example, in addition to the identification means, a protective means made of a transparent light-transmitting sheet is provided on the cover member, the covering member, or the identification means itself, or the transparent means can transmit light instead of the identification means. Protective means made of a simple sheet can be provided on the cover member or the covering member.

  The display (display means) is connected to a control means such as a main control board or an effect control board, and is given to the player according to a display mode of individual or combination of a plurality of light emitters according to a signal from the control means. It can be said that the information relating to the profit (special symbol, number of rounds of the big hit game: game state information) is displayed. The indicator (display means) repeats lighting and extinction of a plurality of light emitters in a predetermined pattern during the symbol variation period, and is determined in advance among the plurality of light emitters immediately after the end of symbol variation or at a timing after the predetermined period. By turning on and off the light emitters corresponding to the formed patterns, display by individual light emitters or combination display by a plurality of light emitters can be performed, and these displays can be performed in a plurality of patterns.

  The display mode displayed directly or indirectly (such as the above-mentioned identification means) by printing on the covering member, and the arrangement of each special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of jackpot game, etc. on the display (display means) By changing both or one of the controls and / or one of the controls, the display device (display means) may be shared by different models.

  The display (display means) can be installed in the front and back area (glass side position) between the front of the game area of the game board (cell image position) and the height direction of the launch rail, and placed on the front of the game board If it is in a range that can be seen through the glass, it is within the game area (the front and back area using the predetermined space of the winning device or the center bonus), or the game area forming part (the member that forms the game area where the game ball can flow down) (It may be a rail or a resin.) Or outside the gaming area (outside the outer rail) Similarly, a covering member may be installed at these positions.

  Specifically, for example, the gaming machine of the embodiment is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display device of the embodiment described above can be used for various types of pachinko gaming machines. Can be installed.

  In addition, for example, in the above-described embodiment, the display is connected to the effect control board, and the effect control board is information related to the benefits given to the player by the display based on the information acquired from the main control board. It is good also as a structure which displays.

  In addition, as a display connected to the main control board for performing various lotteries, reel control, etc. in the spinning-type game machine, a display having the same configuration as the display of the above-described embodiment is provided. Information regarding the profits given to the player in the game with the swing type gaming machine may be displayed. Attach the back of the display board with the LED mounted on the front surface to the casing of the spinning-type game machine, etc., by welding, etc., in a state where traces remain when it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble. A cover member that covers the surface of the substrate may be provided. Then, the display device may display information related to the benefits given to the player in the game with the spinning-type game machine.

◆ [Invention A]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention A, the first light guide (1501), the first light sources (1511, 1521) for making the light incident on the first light guide, and the second light guide (3702), a second light source (3703) for causing light to enter the second light guide, a driving means (4501) for moving the second light guide, the first light source, and the first light source And an effect control means (300, 320) for controlling the drive means, wherein the effect control means produces an effect using the first light guide section and the second light guide section. The gist is to do.
In addition, the gaming machine (100) of the invention A is further characterized in that the first light guide is a fixed light guide and the second light guide is a movable light guide. .
According to the gaming machine (100) of the invention A, an unprecedented new production is possible, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

◆ [Invention B]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention B, the movable part (161), the light guide part (3704) provided at the edge of at least a part of the movable part, and the light source (3703) for making the light incident on the light guide part. ).
The gist of the gaming machine (100) of the invention B is that the light guide portion is transparent or translucent.
According to the gaming machine (100) of the invention B, an unprecedented new effect can be realized and the interest of the game can be further improved.

◆ [Invention C]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention C, at least a part of the first stage bonus (171), the standby position hidden in the first stage bonus, and the portion hidden in the first stage bonus from the player. A second rendering agent (154) that moves between the visually recognizable position that becomes visible and is deformable, and the second rendering agent moves from the standby position to the visually recognizable position. The gist is to enable movement to the visually recognizable position after completing the deformation.
According to the gaming machine (100) of the invention C, an unprecedented new production is possible, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

[Invention D]
The gaming machine (100) of the invention D includes a light guide (1501) disposed in the gaming machine (100) and light emitting means (1511, 1521) capable of emitting light from different directions of the light guide (1501). And a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) that can be emitted by the light emitting means (1511, 1521).

  According to the configuration of the invention D as described above, by controlling the lighting of the light emitting means (1511, 1521) arranged in different directions, a plurality of symbols (1502-1505) can be emitted alternately or together. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ [Invention E]
The gaming machine (100) of the invention E includes a light guide (1501) disposed in the game board unit (102), a plurality of light emitting means (1511, 1521) that can enter the light guide (1501), The gist is to include a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) that are formed by the light guide unit (1501) and can emit light according to different light incident modes from the light emitting means (1511, 1521).

  According to the configuration of the invention E as described above, a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) are emitted by realizing different light incident modes to the light guide unit (1501) using the plurality of LEDs (1511, 1521). Can be made. As a result, a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) can be made to emit light in various forms, and the interest of the game can be improved. Different light incident modes can be realized by combining the LED (1511, 1521) with another optical member in addition to making the arrangement location, directivity, and luminance of the LED (1511, 1521) different.

  In addition, the gaming machine (100) of the invention E includes a light guide unit (1501) disposed in the game board unit (102) and a plurality of light emitting means (1511, 1521) that can enter the light guide unit (1501). 2021, 2022), a lens member (1910, 2000, 2100) between the light guide (1501) and the light emitting means (1511, 1521, 2021, 2022), and a lens member (1910, 2000, 2100). The gist is to include a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) capable of emitting light by the light guide unit (1501) by changing the light incident mode from the light emitting means (1511, 1521, 2021, 2022).

According to another configuration of the invention E as described above, a different entrance to the light guide unit (1501) using a plurality of LEDs (1511, 1521, 2021, 2022) and a lens member (1910, 2000, 2100). By realizing the light mode, a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) can emit light. As a result, a plurality of symbols (1502 to 1505) can be made to emit light in various forms, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a lens member (1910,2000,2100), what has the function to condense or diffuse the light from LED (1511,1521,2021,2022) can be used suitably, for example.

◆ [Invention F]
The gaming machine (100) of the invention F is a gaming machine (100) having a winning area, where a gaming ball can be won and a gaming ball flows above the winning port (2203). A first passage (2201) located upstream in the direction and a second passage (2204) located further downstream in the direction than the first passage (2201), the second passage (2204) The upper surface of) is lower than the lower surface (2202) of the first passage (2201).

  According to the configuration of the invention F as described above, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B is clogged in the path before reaching the winning opening (2203) when the movable piece (117b) is closing or opening. It is. As a result, the fluctuation in time can be made shorter than before, and the player can be less stressed, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine (100) of the invention F, the gap from the lower surface (2202) of the first passage (2201) to the upper surface of the second passage (2204) does not allow the game ball B to enter. This is the gist.

  According to another configuration of the invention F as described above, when the movable piece (117b) is closed, the game ball B is drawn from the gap between the movable piece (117b) and the second passage (2204) ( 2203) can be prevented from entering by mistake. For this reason, the interest of the game can be further improved.

◆ [Invention G]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention G, a movable accessory (154), a driving means (2605) for moving the movable accessory, and a holding mechanism (2609, 4901) for holding the movable accessory in a predetermined position, The holding mechanism holds the movable combination in the predetermined position by the weight of the movable combination or the urging force of the urging means when the movable combination moves to the predetermined position. To do.
According to the gaming machine (100) of the invention G, an unprecedented new production is possible and the interest of the game can be further improved.

◆ [Invention H-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention H-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and a front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) Identification means (5220, 6420) capable of identifying the light emission mode individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (5045, 6245),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The identification means (5220, 6420) is provided on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and a first region (5222, 6226, 6432) that can transmit light or affects transmitted light. A second region (5224, 6428, 6434) provided around the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) and less transmitting light than the first region (5222, 6226, 6432); A combination region (5226, 5904) displayed in two regions (5224, 6428, 6434) and indicating the light emission mode of two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245) as a combination;
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention H-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention H-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and a front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) Identification means (5220, 6420) capable of identifying the light emission mode individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (5045, 6245),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The identification means (5220, 6420) is provided on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and a first region (5222, 6226, 6432) that can transmit light or affects transmitted light. A second region (5224, 6428, 6434) provided around the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) and less transmitting light than the first region (5222, 6226, 6432); A combination region (5226, 5904) displayed in two regions (5224, 6428, 6434) and indicating the light emission mode of two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245) as a combination;
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention I-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention I-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). A window defining section (5212, 6812) configured to distinguish the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) for each window,
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is disposed on the rear side of the covering member (5900) that fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100), and is attached to the covering member (5900). Attached,
The front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) surrounds the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) disposed on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and is difficult to transmit light. Two regions (5224, 6428, 6434) are provided, and the states of the LEDs (5045, 6245) corresponding to the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) via the first regions (5222, 6226, 6432) are set. Distinguishable identification means (5220, 6420) are arranged,
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention I-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention I-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). A window defining section (5212, 6812) configured to distinguish the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) for each window,
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is disposed on the rear side of the covering member (5900) that fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100), and is attached to the covering member (5900). Attached,
The front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) surrounds the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) disposed on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and is difficult to transmit light. Two regions (5224, 6428, 6434) are provided, and the states of the LEDs (5045, 6245) corresponding to the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) via the first regions (5222, 6226, 6432) are set. Distinguishable identification means (5220, 6420) are arranged,
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention J-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention J-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
In the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the peripheral surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) are the cover members (5202, 6402, 7110). Stored inside
A protective member (5204) covering the rear surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) housed in the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) or the display substrate. (5200, 6300, 7200)
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention J-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention J-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
In the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the peripheral surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) are the cover members (5202, 6402, 7110). Stored inside
A protective member (5204) covering the rear surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) housed in the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) or the display substrate. (5200, 6300, 7200)
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention K-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention K-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) has the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) such that the window defining portion (5212, 6812) faces the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ), And individually surrounds the entire circumference of the LEDs (5045, 6245) mounted on the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) by the window defining part (5212, 6812),
It is attached to the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) so as to cover the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and the light emission mode of the LED (5045, 6245) is set for each window (5206, 6206, 7140). Having identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified;
The identification means (5220, 6420) includes areas other than the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536) that easily transmits light and the window (5206, 6206, 7140) in the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110). A second layer (5232, 6531, 6538) which is disposed on the front side so as to overlap the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536) and is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536). Have
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention K-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention K-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) has the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) such that the window defining portion (5212, 6812) faces the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ), And individually surrounds the entire circumference of the LEDs (5045, 6245) mounted on the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) by the window defining part (5212, 6812),
It is attached to the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) so as to cover the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and the light emission mode of the LED (5045, 6245) is set for each window (5206, 6206, 7140). Having identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified;
The identification means (5220, 6420) includes areas other than the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536) that easily transmits light and the window (5206, 6206, 7140) in the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110). A second layer (5232, 6531, 6538) which is disposed on the front side so as to overlap the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536) and is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (5230, 6530, 6536). Have
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention L-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention L-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is covered by a covering member (5900) that is replaceably attached to the game board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear areas of the front side of the game board (102A). Covering
Located on the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and provided on the covering member (5900), the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) is individually or two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245). ) Having identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified as a combination of light emission modes of
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention L-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention L-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is covered by a covering member (5900) that is replaceably attached to the game board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear areas of the front side of the game board (102A). Covering
Located on the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and provided on the covering member (5900), the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) is individually or two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245). ) Having identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified as a combination of light emission modes of
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention M-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention M-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Covering the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) with a covering member (5900) which is attached to the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear regions of the gaming board (102A front side),
The covering member (5900) is positioned on the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (5900), and the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are individually or Identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified as a combination of light emission modes of two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245);
A protective portion (6008) provided on the front surface of the covering member (5900) and covering a peripheral surface of the identification means (5220, 6420) attached to the front surface of the covering member (5900),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention M-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention M-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Covering the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) with a covering member (5900) which is attached to the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear regions of the gaming board (102A front side),
The covering member (5900) is positioned on the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (5900), and the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are individually or Identification means (5220, 6420) that can be identified as a combination of light emission modes of two or more of the LEDs (5045, 6245);
A protective portion (6008) provided on the front surface of the covering member (5900) and covering a peripheral surface of the identification means (5220, 6420) attached to the front surface of the covering member (5900),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention N-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention N-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Covering the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) with a covering member (5900) which is attached to the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (102A),
By identification means (6420) having a first identification part (6422) provided on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and a second identification part (6424) provided on the covering member (5900). The light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) can be identified individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (5045, 6245).
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention N-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention N-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Covering the front side of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) with a covering member (5900) which is attached to the gaming board (102A) of the gaming machine (100) and fills the front and rear regions on the front side of the gaming board (102A),
By identification means (6420) having a first identification part (6422) provided on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and a second identification part (6424) provided on the covering member (5900). The light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) can be identified individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (5045, 6245).
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention O-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention O-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Identification means (5220) formed on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) in accordance with the shape of the region in which the window (5206, 6206, 7140) on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is opened. , 6420) are attached,
The identification means (5220, 6420) surrounds the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) disposed on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and the second region (5224) hardly transmits light. , 6428, 6434) and the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) can be identified through the first region (5222, 6226, 6432). ,
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention O-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention O-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
Identification means (5220) formed on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) in accordance with the shape of the region in which the window (5206, 6206, 7140) on the front surface of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) is opened. , 6420) are attached,
The identification means (5220, 6420) surrounds the first region (5222, 6226, 6432) disposed on the front side of the window (5206, 6206, 7140), and the second region (5224) hardly transmits light. , 6428, 6434) and the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) can be identified through the first region (5222, 6226, 6432). ,
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention P-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention P-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. Cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and rear surface of display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) housed in cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) A protective member (5204) covering
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection member (5204) include an engaging portion (5214) provided on one of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection member (5204). When the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection receiving member (5204) are fitted and combined with the engagement receiving portion (5216), and are difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble from each other. Further, the present invention is characterized in that any one of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protective member (5204) is left with a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention P-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention P-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. Cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and rear surface of display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) housed in cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) A protective member (5204) covering
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection member (5204) include an engaging portion (5214) provided on one of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection member (5204). When the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protection receiving member (5204) are fitted and combined with the engagement receiving portion (5216), and are difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble from each other. Further, the present invention is characterized in that any one of the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the protective member (5204) is left with a trace of removal.

◆ [Invention Q-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention Q-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). ) And the window defining portion (5212, 6812) so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion (5212, 6812) facing the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). And is inserted into the substrate holes (5500, 6700) formed in the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). I, with the alignable alignment unit display substrate (5200,6300,7200) and (5700,6800), relative to the cover member (5202,6402,7110),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention Q-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention Q-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). ) And the window defining portion (5212, 6812) so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion (5212, 6812) facing the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). And is inserted into the substrate holes (5500, 6700) formed in the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). I, with the alignable alignment unit display substrate (5200,6300,7200) and (5700,6800), relative to the cover member (5202,6402,7110),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention R-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention R-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and a surface mounted on the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and mounted on the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245). Current limiting means (5600) for controlling the supplied current,
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention R-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention R-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and a surface mounted on the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200), and mounted on the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245). Current limiting means (5600) for controlling the supplied current,
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention S-1]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention S-1,
A main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, and connected to the main control means (300), and according to a signal from the main control means (300), a special symbol and a lottery corresponding to the special symbol A game comprising display means (5008, 2420) for displaying any one of the number of reserved memories, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, and the reserved memory number for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol by the LEDs (5045, 6245). Machine,
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The main control means (300) includes a current limiting means (6900, 6900, 6900, 7200) for controlling the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) surface-mounted on the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). 6910),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

◆ [Invention S-2]
In the gaming machine (100) of the invention S-2,
Main control means (300) for controlling the progress of the game, a special symbol acquired from the main control means (300), the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the normal symbol The effect control means (320) that produces an effect based on the information related to any of the number of pending storages for the lottery corresponding to, and the signal from the effect control means (320) connected to the effect control means (320) A display means (5008, 2420) for displaying the information by LEDs (5045, 6245) according to
The display means (5008, 2420) includes a display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) on which a plurality of the LEDs (5045, 6245) are surface-mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) on which the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) are mounted. A cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) covering the front surface of the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200),
The cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) penetrates the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (5045, 6245) (5206, 6206, 7140). , And the state of the LED (5045, 6245) corresponding to the window (5206, 6206, 7140) is distinguishable for each of the windows (5206, 6206, 7140) (5212, 6812). )
The effect control means (320) is a current limiting means (6900, 6900) for controlling the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (5045, 6245) surface-mounted on the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). 6910),
In the display means (5008, 2420), it is difficult to remove the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) from the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110), the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200) and the cover. It is difficult to reassemble the member (5202, 6402, 7110), or when the display means (5008, 2420) is disassembled, the cover member (5202, 6402, 7110) and the display substrate (5200, 6300, 7200). ) Is characterized in that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment mentioned above is for making an understanding of this invention easy, and does not limit this invention. The present invention can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Game machine 1501 ... Light guide part 1511 ... LED (light emission means)
1521 ... LED (light emitting means)
1502 ... Symbol 1503 ... Symbol 1504 ... Symbol 1505 ... Symbol

Claims (1)

A light guide disposed in the gaming machine;
A first light emitting means emitting be Rukoto capable to cause incident from the first direction with respect to the light guide unit,
A second light emitting means capable of emitting light to enter the light guide portion from a second direction;
Condensing means for condensing the light from the second light emitting means to enter the light guide unit;
A region becomes visible by the light pattern formed by the light guide portion is incident from the first light emitting means, a first recessed region in which a plurality of recesses are formed,
A second concave region in which a pattern formed by the light guide is visible by light incident from the light collecting unit, and a plurality of concave portions are formed;
Equipped with a,
In the light guide portion, a region where a plurality of recesses are not formed is formed between the first light emitting unit and the first recess region and between the light collecting unit and the second recess region. Have
A gaming machine characterized by that.